Home
        Pilot Manual.book
         Contents
1.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Sensor a Sensor Center Line  Column Column   sss   Column Column Column Column     sss   Column Column  Vert  Vert  Vert  Vert  Vert  Vert  Vert  Vert   Shift Pixels Shift Pixels Shift Pixels Shift Pixels   Shift Pixels Shift Pixels Shift Pixels Shift Pixels  Reg  Reg  Reg  Reg  Reg  Reg  Reg  Reg   Line l  Line    E i        a5  Line aa    aa    a    l I _  L  i ag    aa    aa    ag    ag    l I _  E _  agi    aa    aa    a    agi    a  aH  Line a  Line a  Line     C O je             e   a FL  gt  YS        C C  Left Horizontal Shift Register Right Horizontal Shift Register   gt   gt   f  ADC    Fig  20  CCD Sensor Architecture    58    yal    Oo    Basler pilot    Camera Functional Description        ExpActive       TrigRdy    Ethernet Ethernet  vec Controller    lt       __ gt   Image Data Network  and    Control Data    Control    Micro   Control  Controller Control  AOI  Gain  Black Level Data       Fig  21  Camera Block Diagram    Basler pilot 59    Camera Functional Description    60 Basler pilot    Physical Interface    7 Physical Interface    This section provides detailed information  such as pinouts and voltage requirements  for the  physical interface on the camera  This information will be especially useful during your ini
2.                                                                                                         gt           Fig  17  Incomplete Stream of Packets and Part of the Resend Mechanism     1  Stream of packets  Gray indicates that the status was checked as the packet entered the  receive window  White indicates that the status has not yet been checked      2  Receive window of the performance driver     3  As packet 1003 enters the receive window  packet 1002 is detected as missing     4  Interval defined by the Resend Timeout parameter     5  The Resend Timeout interval expires and the first resend request for packet 1002 is sent to    the camera  The camera does not respond with a resend     S    Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter      7  The Resend Response Timeout interval expires and a second resend request for packet  1002 is sent to the camera  The camera does not respond with a resend      8  Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter      9  The Resend Response Timeout interval expires and a third resend request for packet 1002 is  sent to the camera  The camera still does not respond with a resend      10  Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter      11  Because the maximum number of resend requests has been sent and the last Resend  Response Timeout interval has expired  packet 1002 is now considered as lost      12  End of the frame    13  Missing packets at the end of the frame  2999 and 3000     14  Inte
3.                                                              Horizontal Binning by 2 Horizontal Binning by 3 Horizontal Binning by 4  popopo 1 COD l i  GCOGOGOEH CODCOD  apanpogpogo CODCOD 00D  cDponDpagpa gp 00D  cpopopgogp GOOGE0  c DO DDCOCT g CODCODO    aponcpenpogp g J  cocoEpEnr y a2oop icpo                                                                                                       Fig  46  Horizontal Binning    1    Q   o gt      Basler pilot    Features    The availability of binning differs between the camera models                          Camera Model Vertical Binning Horizontal Binning  piA640 210gm by 2  3  or 4 by 2  3  or 4  piA1000 48gm by 2  3  or 4 by 2  3  or 4  piA1600 35gm by 2  3  or 4 by 2  3  or 4  piA1900 32gm by 2 by 2  piA2400 12gm by 2  3  or 4 by 2  3  or 4  piA2400 17gm by 2  3  or 4 by 2  3  or 4                   You can combine vertical and horizontal binning  This  however  may cause objects to appear dis   torted in the image  For more information on possible image distortion due to combined vertical and  horizontal binning  see the following section     Setting Binning    You can enable vertical binning by setting the Binning Vertical parameter  Setting the parameter   s  value to 2  3  or 4 enables vertical binning by 2  vertical binning by 3  or vertical binning by 4 respec   tively  Setting the parameter   s value to 1 disables vertical binning     You can enable horizontal binning by setting the Binning Horizontal parameter  S
4.                                              NN       Auto Function AOI                                                                   Image AOI                                                                                        J  g          0123 4 5 6 7 89 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30                               Auto Function AOI                                                             Image AOI          a  HEHHEHE  E                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           Imr        O   a    mMmrmrmee    012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30                                        Auto Function AOI                                                             z  LLL   B   an          E    m Image AOI                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    RRA   o    Fig  52  Various Degrees of Overlap Between the Auto Function AOI and the Image AOI    184 Basler pilot    Features    Setting an Auto Function AOI    Setting an Auto Function AOI is a two step process  You must first select the Auto Function AOI  related to the auto fu
5.                    Note    Exposure time can not only be manually set  see below   but can also be  automatically adjusted     Exposure Auto is an auto function and the  automatic  counterpart to manually  setting an  absolute  exposure time  The exposure auto function automatically  adjusts the Auto Exposure Time Abs parameter value     In contrast to the manually set  absolute  exposure time  the automatically  adjusted  absolute  exposure time is not restricted to multiples of the current  exposure time base  The automatic adjustment is not available when trigger width  exposure mode is selected     For more information about auto functions  see Section 11 11 1 on page 196     For more information about the Exposure Auto function  see Section 11 11 3 on  page 205        For information on parameter settings for obtaining the maximum possible exposure time  see  Section 8 4 1 on page 92     Basler pilot    91       Image Acquisition Control    8 4 1 Setting the Exposure Time Using  Raw  Settings    When exposure time is set using  raw  values  the exposure time will be determined by a  combination of two elements  The first element is the value of the Exposure Time Raw parameter   and the second element is the Exposure Time Base  The exposure time is determined by the  product of these two elements     Exposure Time    Exposure Time Raw Parameter Value  x  Exposure Time Base     By default  the Exposure Time Base is fixed at 20 us  Typically  the exposure time is adjusted b
6.             114   9 2 5 YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  Packed Format               000 0c eee eee eee 114   9 3 Pixel Data Output Formats for Color Cameras      1    6  eee naarn n nrn 115  9 3 1   Th   Bayer Color Filters 2evedeee yd evi aa sees need Pee Sees 115  9 3 1 1 Color Filter Alignment               0 2    e eee eee 116   9 3 2 Bayer GB 8 Format  Equivalent to DCAM Raw 8                       117   9 3 3 Bayer BG 8 Format  Equivalent to DCAM Raw 8                   45  119   9 3 4 Bayer GB 16 Format  Equivalent to DCAM Raw 16                     121   9 3 5 Bayer BG 16 Format  Equivalent to DCAM Raw 16                     123   9 3 6 Bayer GB 12 Packed Format             0 0  e eee cee 125   9 3 7 Bayer BG 12 Packed Format            0    cee eects 127   9 3 8 YUV 4 2 2 Packed Format  Equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2               129   9 3 9 YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  Packed Format               000 cece eee eee 132  9 3 10 Mono 8 Format  Equivalent to DCAM Mono 8                    0  45 134  1OVO Control ieont ia a ewe er Rae bw Lee eR awe 137  10 1 Configuring Input Lines      0 0 0    eee 137  10 1 1 Assigning an Input Line to Receive a Hardware Trigger Signal            137  10 1 2 Using an Unassigned Input Line to Receive a User Input Signal           138   10 2   Configuring  Output  Lines iia ee E E AEE tava eG Beever 139  10 2 1 Assigning a Camera Output Signal to a Physical Output Line             139  10 2 2 Setting the State of User Settable Output Lines                        140
7.             Byte Data   Bo Y value for Po  B  U value for Po  Bo Y value for P   B3 V value for Po  B4 Y value for Po  B5 U value for Ps  Be Y value for P3  B7 V value for Ps  Bg Y value for P4  Bg U value for P4  Bio Y value for Ps  By  V value for P4  Bm 7 Y value for Ph 3  Bm 6 U value for Ph 3  Bm 5 Y value for Ph 2  Bm 4 V value for Ph 3  Bm 3 Y value for Ph 4  Bm 2 U value for P     Bm 1 Y value for Ph  Bm V value for Ph 4   132    Basler pilot    Pixel Data Formats    When a color camera is set for YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  output  the pixel data output for the Y component  is 8 bit data of the    unsigned char    type  The range of data values for the Y component and the  corresponding indicated signal levels are shown below                             This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level   Hexadecimal   Decimal    OxFF 255   OxFE 254   0x01 1   0x00 0                The pixel data output for the U component or the V component is 8 bit data of the    straight binary     type  The range of data values for a U or a V component and the corresponding indicated signal  levels are shown below                                               This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level   Hexadecimal   Decimal    OxFF 127   OxFE 126   0x81   0x80 0   Ox7F  1   0x01  127   0x00  128                The signal level of a U component or a V component can range from  128 to  127  decimal   Notice  that the data values have been arranged to represent the full signal level range     Note 
8.        0    eee 2  1 3 Spectral Response for Mono Cameras              0 0000 cece eee 8  1 4 Spectral Response for Color Cameras        s    usana 000 cece eee 11  1 5 Mechanical Specifications        0 0    eee 14  1 5 1 Standard HOUSING sraa ceed de ee ia a ey eee ee ed ee ed dae 14  1 5 1 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points                     14   1 5 1 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy            0 00  e eee ee 16   15 2  90   Head Housing     si serey ed ede Se eee oe Eee dee ee 17  1 5 2 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points                     17   1 5 2 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy           0 0    eaaa 19   1 5 3 Maximum Thread Length on Color Cameras              00000 ee eee ee 20   1 5 4 Mechanical Stress Test Results          0    00  c cee eee 21   1 6 Software Licensing Information          0 0 0    22  1 7 Avoiding EMI and ESD Problems           0 0 00  cece 23  1 8 Environmental Requirements            0 0 00  c eee ee 24  1 8 1 Temperature and Humidity           0 0 0    eee 24   1 8 2  Heat Dissipation ys iss Sirep eiae A wee SRA RE ee es 24   1 9  a DO  a EA A E E EEE E EE E E EA E ae oe Geetha de 25  Software and Hardware Installation              000 cee eee eee eee 27  Tools for Changing Camera Parameters            000 eee cence eens 29  321    The pylon VieWer once ni ete eae Sew e Me ROn died dinar ed BOOS Sear Ee ean    29  3 2   The lP Contiguration  Tolk einai neea Vie rite Weer ee eee Cele ey vie eet 29  3 3     The pylon  APh ie cri iri eee
9.        00000ee 84  8 3 1 Exposure Modes ery perii dadea panike eena eSEE eens 85  8 3 2 Setting the Camera for Hardware Triggering              0  eee ee eee 87    8 4    8 5    8 6  8 7    8 3 3 Acquiring a Single Image by Applying One Hardware Trigger Transition      88  8 3 4 Acquiring Images by Applying a Series of Hardware Trigger Transitions      89    Exposure Time Parameters             000  c eect eee eens 91  8 4 1 Setting the Exposure Time Using  Raw  Settings                   000  92  8 4 2 Setting the Exposure Time Using  Absolute  Settings                    93  Overlapping Exposure and Sensor Readout                00 0c cee eee ee 94  8 5 1 Guidelines for Overlapped Operation             0    eee eee 95  Trigger Ready Signal          0 0    cece te eee teenies 96  Exposure Active Signal     2 0    0 0    eee teeta eee 98    Basler pilot    Table of Contents    8 8 Acquisition Timing Chart     0    0    0  cette 99  8 9 Maximum Allowed Acquisition Frame Rate             0 00  eee eee ee 102  9  Pixel Dale Formats ccia cde atwase ante Sree AEN aa 107  9 1 Setting the Pixel Data Format            0 0    cece ee eee 107  9 2 Pixel Data Formats for Mono Cameras            0 0 c eee eee 109  9 2 1 Mono 8 Format  Equivalent to DCAM Mono 8                       45 109   9 2 2 Mono 16 Format  Equivalent to DCAM Mono 16                    4   110   9 2 3 Mono 12 Packed Format          0    0  cece eee 112   9 2 4 YUV 4 2 2 Packed Format  Equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2   
10.        If the pixel values being output by the camera   s sensor are high enough to set bit 10 or bit 11 to 1   we recommend not using shift by 2  If you do nonetheless  all bits output from the camera will  automatically be set to 1  Therefore  you should only use the shift by 2 setting when your pixel  readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 1024           Shift By 3   When the camera is set to shift by 3  the   output from the camera will include bit 8 ADC   through bit O from each ADC along with 3 Pas ge hs Aen ee A ats Sais cate cr   zeros as LSBs  ee   The result of shifting 3 times is that the   output of the camera is effectively multiplied lM L   S S    By S  ie Shifted Three Times a    When the camera is set to shift by 3  the 3   least significant bits output from the camera   for each pixel value will be 0  This means that the gray value scale will only include every 8th gray  value  for example  8  16  24  32  and so on     If the pixel values being output by the camera   s sensor are high enough to set bit 9  bit 10  or bit 11  to 1  we recommend not using shift by 3  If you do nonetheless  all bits output from the camera will  automatically be set to 1  Therefore  you should only use the shift by 3 setting when your pixel  readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 512     Shift By 4   When the camera is set to shift by 4  the   output from the camera will
11.        double resultingFps   Camera ResultingFrameRateAbs GetValue        For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     Basler pilot 49    Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth    5 2 Managing Bandwidth When  Multiple Cameras Share a  Single Network Path    If you are using a single camera on a GigE network  the problem of managing bandwidth is simple   The network can easily handle the bandwidth needs of a single camera and no intervention is  required  A more complicated situation arises if you have multiple cameras connected to a single  network adapter as shown in Figure 19     Adapter        Single Path    Network  Switch    GigE  Camera    Fig  19  Multiple Cameras on a Network    One way to manage the situation where multiple cameras are sharing a single network path is to  make sure that only one of the cameras is acquiring and transmitting images at any given time  The  data output from a single camera is well within the bandwidth capacity of the single path and you  should have no problem with bandwidth in this case     If you want to acquire and transmit images from several cameras simultaneously  however  you  must determine the total data output rate for all the cameras that will be operating simultaneously  an
12.        eect eetteeeeeeeeeeteneeeeees 52  jumbo Packets 2    eee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeees 52  L  LEDS iinit anad aasa 61  64  lens Ad ANTE    neeese eerren 2 4 6  lens thread length    20  level controlled exposure mode                 85  line inverter parameter            eee 141  line Selector ee 139  line source parameter    139    Basler pilot    Index    line status all chunk  ececececen 209  line status parameter      seeeceeee 147  LUT  luminance lookup table                  176  LUT enable parameter           eee 178  LUT index parameter              eee 178  LUT selector           ccccceceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 178  M  max frame jitter parameter            eee 47  max height parameter             eee 218  max number resend request parameter    37  max width parameter eee 218  maximum acquisition frame rate             102  maximum lens thread length    20  mechanical drawings    secen 14  mechanical stress test    21  mirror image erer aa a aT 170  missing packet   detebtio narea e eaaa 33   SUAUUS P E E O A 33  mode of operation  of auto function    CONTINUOUS             0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 181   ONCE aa TE ade ian 181  MOOEIS eeaeee oaaae a eara abet 1  mono 12 packed pixel format                  112  mono 16 pixel format           cece 110  mono 8 pixel format                06  109  134  mounting holes                ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 17  multiple cameras on a network                50  N  network adapter   packet sizeren a a 52  network drivers     
13.       cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeetees 31  network parameter aececi 51  network performance seee 51  network switch   packet SiZ niiin 52  O  optical size of the sensor             0 2 4 6  output frame rate neee 174  output line   voltage requirement                cee 73    237    Index    output lines    CONTIQUIING 6  cc Ate aed 139  electrical characteristics             0 73  INVOMOGD ies E el eaaa ae 141  FESPONSE TIME o oo    eect ee eeeeeeteteeeeteneeee 75  voltage requirement               0 ceeee 73  overlapped exposure    seese 94  P  packet size  COMO G2  isin iadacatadeehaiatisinie fsdoadadeateates 52  network adapter secere 52  network SWIICH eccerre 52  packet size parameter    43  packet timeout parameter                4  32  37  parameter Sets              eens 220  parameter sets  SAVIN    221  parameters loaded at startup                 224  payload size parameter    43  performance driver    31  PIN ASSIQNMENHS s e 62  PIN numbering 000 2    cece ee eeeeeeeteneeeeteaeees 63  pixel data formats    107  YUV 422  YUYV  packed             4 114  YUV 422 packed    114  pixel format parameter     eeeeeee 108  pixel formats  Bayer BG 12 packed    127  Bayer BG 16  esseeirisrrssrrreesn 123  Bayer BG 8a tan 119  Bayer GB 12 packed    125  Bayer GB 16 rrna eeens 121  Bayer GB  8 aristaa tinana 117  MONO 12 packed seene 112  MONO  G cisiiiisssrinni eiriaa 110  M  NO E reia a pedidas 109  134  YUV 422  YUYV  packed             4 132  YUV 422 packed   129  pixel SIZE 
14.       int64_t dynamicRangeMax   Camera ChunkDynamicRangeMax GetValue           ChunkPixelFormatEnums pixelFormat   Camera ChunkPixelFormat GetValue       For more information about using the chunk parser  see the sample code that is included with the  Basler pylon Software Development Kit  SDK      Basler pilot 201    Features    11 17 3Frame Counter    The Frame Counter feature numbers images sequentially as they are acquired  When the feature  is enabled  a chunk is added to each image containing the value of the counter     The frame counter is a 32 bit value  The counter starts at 0 and increments by 1 for each acquired  image  The counter counts up to 4294967295 unless it is reset before  see below   After having  reached the maximum value the counter will continue counting  starting at 0     Be aware that if the camera is acquiring images continuously and continuous capture is stopped   several numbers in the counting sequence may be skipped  This happens due to the internal image  buffering scheme used in the camera     Note   The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the frame counter  feature or any of the other chunk feature  Making the chunk mode inactive  disables all chunk features     To enable the frame counter chunk     Use the Chunk Selector to select the Frame Counter chunk   Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true     Once the frame counter chunk is enabled  the camera will add a frame counter chunk to each  acquired i
15.      Signal h    Output  Line  Voltage          Time    Fig  28  Output Line Response Times    Time Delay Rise  TDR    1 5 us  Rise Time  RT    1 3   5 0 us  Time Delay Fall  TDF    1   20 us  Fall Time  FT    1  5 us    Note   The response times for the output lines on your camera will typically fall into  the ranges specified above  The exact response time for your specific  application will depend on the external resistor and the applied voltage you  use     Basler pilot 75    Physical Interface    VO_In1    Q  BF545C        In_1_ Ctrl    Gnd VO_In_Gnd    VO_In_2         Q  BF545C    In_2 Ctrl    Gnd VO_In_Gnd    Out_1_Ctrl CERES  VO_Out_VCC             Q  BC847BS    VO_Out1    Out_2 Ctrl 2200 1 0_Out_VCC             Q  BC847BS    VO_Out_2    Out_3_ Ctrl 220 Q 1 0_Out_VCC             Q  BC847BS    1 O_Out_3    Out_4 Ctrl 220 2  O_Out_VCC             Q  BC847BS    VO_Out_4    Fig  29  I O Line Schematic    76    12 Pin  Receptacle    In_Pwr_Gnd  VO_In_1  VO_In_2   V O_In_Gnd  VO_Out_1  VO_Out_2   In_Pwr_VCC  VO_Out_VCC  VO_Out_3  V O_Out_4         OMANDOOARWDN      Basler pilot    Image Acquisition Control    8 Image Acquisition Control    This section provides detailed information about controlling image acquisition  You will find details  about setting the exposure time for each acquired image and about how the camera   s maximum  allowed acquisition frame rate can vary depending on the current camera settings     8 1 Controlling Image Acquisition with  Parameters Only  N
16.     Different voltage levels apply  depending on whether the standard power and     O cable or a PLC power and I O cable is used  see below       Voltage Levels When the Standard Power and I O Cable is Used    The following voltage requirements apply to the camera   s I O input  pins 3 and 4 of the 12 pin  receptacle         Voltage Significance        0 to  24 VDC Recommended operating voltage         0 to  1 4 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 0         gt   1 4 to  2 2 VDC   Region where the transition threshold occurs  the logical state is not defined in this                   region     gt   2 2 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 1     30 0 VDC Absolute maximum  the camera may be damaged when the absolute maximum is  exceeded        Table 7  Voltage Requirements for the I O Input When Using the Standard Power and I O Cable    70 Basler pilot    Physical Interface    Voltage Levels When a PLC Power and I O Cable is Used    The following voltage requirements apply to the input of the PLC power and I O cable  The PLC  power and I O cable will adjust the voltages to the levels required at the camera   s I O input  see  Table 5         Voltage Significance        0 to  24 VDC Recommended operating voltage         0 to  8 4 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 0         gt   8 4 to  10 4 VDC   Region where the transition threshold occurs  the logical state is not defined in this  region         gt   10 4 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 1         30 0 VDC Absolute maximum
17.     Index    Bayer BG 16 pixel format    ee 123  Bayer BG 8 pixel format    119  Bayer filter eiai thence paves 115  Bayer GB 12 packed pixel format           125  Bayer GB 16 pixel format    ee 121  Bayer GB 8 pixel format    117  DINNING   tei tee a hte 166  AOI settings               eeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 168  image distortion            eee eee 168  reduced resolution           eceeeeeeeeeee 168  response to light           eee 168  SEWING a ire eiaeiiai 167  Dit depths iaioe ienaa 2 4 6  black level  explained iirrainn 153  SOMING areneda 153  black level raw all   153  black level raw tap 1 ccce 153  black level raw tap 2 cecce 153  block diagram 0 00    ee eeeeeseseeeeeeneeeeteneeeeeeaes 59  C  cables  Etherneti er r 65  power and I O  PLO     65  67  power and I O  standard                  65  camera power requirements          2  4  6  68    chunk dynamic range max parameter     200  chunk dynamic range min parameter      200  chunk enable parameter    abies tales eld LAN 202  205  206  209  211  chunk frame counter parametet              202  chunk height parameter               eee 200  chunk line status all parameter               209  CHUNK mode    0    eee eee eeeeeee cette eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 200  chunk mode active parameter                 200  chunk offset x parameter            eee 200  chunk offset y parameter                005 200  chunk parser    200  202  205  206  209  211  chunk pixel format parameter                  200  chunk selector         202  20
18.     Setting the Delay with Raw Values    When the delay time for a timer is set using  raw  values  the delay time will be determined by a  combination of two elements  The first element is the value of the Timer Delay Raw parameter  and  the second element is the Timer Delay Time Base  The delay time is the product of these two  elements     Delay Time    Timer Delay Raw Parameter Value  x  Timer Delay Time Base     By default  the Timer Delay Time Base is fixed at 1 us  Typically  the delay time is adjusted by setting  the Timer Delay Raw parameter value     The Timer Delay Raw parameter value can range from 0 to 4095  So if the value is set to 100  for  example  the timer delay will be 100 x 1 us or 100 us     To set the delay for a timer     Use the Timer Selector to select a timer   Set the value of the Timer Delay Raw parameter   You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Delay Raw parameter value from within your    application software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to  set the selector and the parameter value           Camera TimerSelector SetValue  TimerSelector_Timerl          Camera TimerDelayRaw SetValue  100     For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     Changing the Delay Time Base    By default  the Timer Delay Time Base is fixed at 1 us  minimum value 
19.     execute reset by software          Camera CounterReset Execute             disable reset       Camera CounterResetSource SetValue  CounterResetSource_Off     For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide    and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     208 Basler pilot    Features    11 17 6Line Status All    The Line Status All feature samples the status of all of the camera   s input lines and output lines each  time an image acquisition is triggered  It then adds a chunk to each acquired image containing the  line status information     The line status all information is a 32 bit value  As shown in Figure 54  certain bits in the value are  associated with each line and the bits will indicate the state of the lines  If a bit is 0  it indicates that  the state of the associated line was low at the time of triggering  If a bit is 1  it indicates that the state  of the associated line is was high at the time of triggering     Indicates output line 4 state  Indicates output line 3 state  Indicates output line 2 state Indicates input line 2 state  Indicates output line 1 state Indicates input line 1 state        34 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20  19  1817  16  15  14  13  12  14 10  9  8  7 le  54l l2   o     Fig  54  Line Status All Parameter Bits    Note      The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the line status all  feature or any of the other c
20.    If you use the single image acquisition process repeatedly  you must not begin acquisition of a new  image until transmission of the previously acquired image is complete     You can set the exposure time and the Acquisition Mode parameter values from within your  application software by using the pylon API  You can also execute the Acquisition Start and Trigger  Software commands  The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the parameter  values and execute the commands        Camera ExposureTimeRaw SetValue  200          Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue  AcquisitionMode_SingleFrame          prepare for image capture       Camera AcquisitionStart Execute           Camera TriggerSoftware Execute           retrieve the captured image    For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters   For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     For more information about the camera   s exposure time parameter  see Section 8 4 on page 91     Basler pilot 81    Image Acquisition Control    8 2 3 Acquiring Images by Applying a Series of  Software Triggers    You can set the camera to react to multiple applications of the software trigger and then apply a  series of software triggers to acquire images  To do so  follow this sequence     Access the camera   s API and set the exposure time parame
21.    The signal level of a U component or a V component can range from  128 to  127  decimal   Notice  that the data values have been arranged to represent the full signal level range     Note     The interpolation and conversion algorithms are applied to the averaged pixel  values when the averaging feature is used     Basler pilot 131    Pixel Data Formats    9 3 9 YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  Packed Format    On color cameras  the YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  packed pixel data format is similar to the YUV 4 2 2 pixel  format described in the previous section  The only difference is the order of the bytes transmitted  to the host PC  With the YUV 4 2 2 format  the bytes are ordered as specified in the DCAM standard  issued by the 1394 Trade Association  With the YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  format  the bytes are ordered to  emulate the ordering normally associated with analog frame grabbers and Windows   frame buffers     The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer    in your PC when the camera is set for YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  output     With this format  the Y component is transmitted for each pixel  but the U and V components are    only transmitted for every second pixel    The following standards are used in the table   Po   the first pixel transmitted by the camera  Ph   the last pixel transmitted by the camera  Bg   the first byte in the buffer   Bm   the last byte in the buffer                                                                            
22.   10 2 3 Setting an Output Line for Invert           0 00    cee eee 141  10 2 4 Working with Timers       0 0    eee 142  10 2 4 1 Setting the Trigger Source fora Timer                   04  142   10 2 4 2 Setting a Timer Delay Time               0 0    143   10 2 4 3 Setting a Timer Duration Time                0 0 02 144   10 3 Checking the State of the I O Lines            20    0020 ee 147  10 3 1 Checking the State of a Single Output Line                      004  147  10 3 2 Checking the State of All Lines        0    2  cee ee 147   T1 Feat  reS  i sesanan didi he Raw e eee et awe Res as E a 149  IET GaN ieie a pap E eE aa t a rina EN arate Srtind  ater Te ae estate aya  eAuKt 149  11 2 Black Level esei d eniri tenaaa Oo Aaa ewe eae eee be Pee es 153  11 3 White Balance  on Color Models               00 00  c eee tee eee 155  Basler pilot iii    Table of Contents    11  11    11    11  11  11  11  11    11  11  11  11  11    11  11  11  11    A DigitalSHIt cick Se steerer ldo a BN eet AY Ea ete ad con oe Ss hg a ia 156  11 4 1 Digital Shift with 12 Bit Pixel Formats               0 0 0 2    eee eee 156  11 4 2 Digital Shift with 8 Bit Pixel Formats                00 0020  e eee eee 158  11 4 3 Precautions When Using Digital Shift                       2  000   160  11 4 4 Enabling and Setting Digital Shift                     0 0 0 2 eee eee 160    5 Integrated IR Cut Filter  on Color Models                 00 00  c cee eee eee 162    6  Area of Interest  AOI   eepe e
23.   11 13 Disable Parameter Limits    For each camera parameter  the allowed range of parameter values normally is limited  The factory  limits are designed to ensure optimum camera operation and  in particular  good image quality  For  special camera uses  however  it may be helpful to set parameter values outside of the factory limits     The disable parameter limits feature lets you disable the factory parameter limits for certain   parameters  When the factory parameter limits are disabled  the parameter values can be set within  extended limits  Typically  the range of the extended limits is dictated by the physical restrictions of  the camera   s electronic devices  such as the absolute limits of the camera   s variable gain control     The values for the extended limits can be seen using the Basler pylon Viewer or from within your  application via the pylon API        Note  Currently  the parameter limits can only be disabled on the Gain feature     To disable the limits for a parameter   Use the Parameter Selector to select the parameter whose limits you wish to disable   Set the value of the Remove Limits parameter     You can set the Parameter Selector and the value of the Remove Limits parameter from within your  application software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to  set the selector and the parameter value           Select the feature whose factory limits will be disabled    Camera ParameterSelector SetValue  ParameterS
24.   4    Fig  56  Test Image One    Test Image 2   Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient  8 bit     The 8 bit moving diagonal gray gradient test image is similar to test image 1  but it is not stationary   The image moves by one pixel from right to left whenever a new image acquisition is initiated  The  test pattern uses a counter that increments by one for each new image acquisition     The mathematical expression for this test image is     Gray Value    column number   row number   counter  MOD 256    Test Image 3   Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient  12 bit     The 12 bit moving diagonal gray gradient test image is similar to test image 2  but it is a 12 bit  pattern  The image moves by one pixel from right to left whenever a new image acquisition is  initiated  The test pattern uses a counter that increments by one for each new image acquisition     The mathematical expression for this test image is     Gray Value    column number   row number   counter  MOD 4096    216 Basler pilot    Features    Test Image 4   Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient Feature Test  8 bit     The basic appearance of test image 4 is similar to test image 2  the 8 bit moving diagonal gray  gradient image   The difference between test image 4 and test image 2 is this  if a camera feature  that involves digital processing is enabled  test image 4 will show the effects of the feature while  test image 2 will not  This makes test image 4 useful for checking the effects of digital features such  as the luminance lookup 
25.   AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue  AutoFunctionAOISelector_AOIl1           AutoFunctionAOIOffsetX SetValue  0       AutoFunctionAOIOffsetY SetValue  0       AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue  Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax         AutoFunctionAOTHeight SetValue  Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax            For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     11 12 1 3 Using an Auto Function    To use an auto function  carry out the following steps     OPS  Be Bo  oS    Select the Auto Function AOI that is related to the auto function you want to use   Set the postion and size of the Auto Function AOI    If necessary  set the lower and upper limits for the auto functions   s parameter value   If necessary  set the target value    If necessary  set the auto function profile to define priorities between auto functions   Enable the auto function by setting it to  once  or  continuous      For more information the individual settings  see the sections below that describe the indvidual auto    functions     186    Basler pilot    Features    11 12 2Gain Auto    Gain Auto is an auto function and the  automatic  counterpart of the manual gain feature  The gain  auto function automatically carries out a Gain Raw  All  adjustment  When the gain auto function is  operational  the Gain Raw  All  parameter value is automatically adju
26.   B3 Brightness value for P3 Bm 3 Brightness value for Ph 3  B4 Brightness value for P4 Bm 2 Brightness value for Ph 2  e e Bm 1 Brightness value for P  4  e e Bm Brightness value for Ph          With the camera set for Mono 8  the pixel data output is 8 bit data of the    unsigned char    type  The  available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the    table below                                   This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level   Hexadecimal   Decimal    OxFF 255   OxFE 254   0x01 1   0x00 0          Basler pilot    109    Pixel Data Formats    9 2 2 Mono 16 Format  Equivalent to DCAM Mono 16     When a monochrome camera is set for the Mono16 pixel data format  it outputs 16 bits of brightness  data per pixel with 12 bits effective  The 12 bits of effective pixel data fill from the least significant    bit  The four unused most significant bits are filled with zeros     The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer  in your PC when the camera is set for Mono16 output  Note that the data is placed in the image  buffer in little endian format     The following standards are used in the table     Pg   the first pixel transmitted by the camera    Ph   the last pixel transmitted by the camera  Bg   the first byte in the buffer    Bm   the last byte in the buffer                                                                            Byte Data   Bo Low byte of brig
27.   Bm 2 Y value for Ph 2  Bm 1 Y value for Ph 4  Bm Y value for Ph          With the camera set for Mono 8  the pixel data output is 8 bit data of the    unsigned char    type  The  available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the    table below     134    Basler pilot                               This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level   Hexadecimal   Decimal    OxFF 255   OxFE 254   0x01 1   0x00 0                   Note    Pixel Data Formats    The interpolation and conversion algorithms are applied to the averaged pixel  values when the averaging feature is used     Pixel Transmission Sequence    For each captured image  pixel data is transmitted from the camera in the following sequence     Row 0 Col 0   Row   Col         Row 2 Col 0     Row n 2 Col 0  Row n 1 Col       Row p Col         Row g Col 15  Row   Col 4     Row 2 Col 49    Row n 2 Col 1   Row n 1 Col 43    Row p Col 4     Row 0 Col 2  Row 1 Col 2    Row 2 Col 2    Row n 2 Col 2  Row n 1 Col 2    Row   Col  gt     Row 0 Col m 2   Row   Col m 2     Row 2 Col m 2     Row n 2 Col m 23  Row n 1 Col m 23    Row p Col m 2     Where Row 9g Col g is the upper left corner of the sensor    Row 0 Col m 1 gt   Row   Col m 1     Row 2 Col m 1 gt     Row n 2 Col m 1   Row n 1 Col m 1     Row p Col m 1     Row 9 Col m  Row   Col m    Row  gt  Col m    Row p 2 Col m  Row y 4 Col m    Row p Col m    The columns are numbered 0 through m from the left side to the right side of th
28.   Even Lines Odd Lines   Byte Data Byte Data   Bo Low byte of blue value for Po Bo Low byte of green value for Po  B  High byte of blue value for Po B4 High byte of green value for Po  Bo Low byte of green value for P4 Bo Low byte of red value for P    B3 High byte of green value for P4 B3 High byte of red value for P4   B4 Low byte of blue value for Ps B4 Low byte of green value for Po  Bs High byte of blue value for Po Bs High byte of green value for P  Be Low byte of green value for P3 Be Low byte of red value for P3   B7 High byte of green value for P3 B7 High byte of red value for P3  Bm 7 Low byte of blue value for Ph 3 Bm 7 Low byte of green value for Ph 3  Bm 6 High byte of blue value for P _3 Bm 6 High byte of green value for Ph 3  Bm 5 Low byte of green value for Ph 2 Bm 5 Low byte of red value for P  5  Bm 4 High byte of green value for Ph 2 Bm 4 High byte of red value for Ph 2                         Basler pilot 123    Pixel Data Formats                                           Bm 3 Low byte of blue value for P    Bm 3 Low byte of green value for P  4  Bm 2 High byte of blue value for Ph 4 Bm 2 High byte of green value for P      Bm 1 Low byte of green value for Ph Bm 1 Low byte of red value for Ph  Bm High byte of green value for Ph Bm High byte of red value for Ph             When the camera is set for Bayer BG 16  the pixel data output is 16 bit data of the    unsigned short   little endian     type  The available range of data values and the corresponding in
29.   Result       ChunkParser AttachBuffer   unsigned char   Result Buffer       Result GetPayloadSize       int64_t lineStatusAll   Camera ChunkLineStatusAll GetValue  j     For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     210 Basler pilot    Features    11 17 7CRC Checksum    The CRC  Cyclic Redundancy Check  Checksum feature adds a chunk to each acquired image  containing a CRC checksum calculated using the Z modem method  As shown in Figure 6 2  the  checksum is calculated using all of the image data and all of the appended chunks except for the  checksum itself  The CRC chunk is always the last chunk appended to the image data     CRC checksum is calculated on this data       Image Data   ChunkX   ChunkY   Chunk     including any required padding      Data   Data   CRC       Fig  55  CRC Checksum    Note      The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the CRC feature or any  of the other chunk feature  Making the chunk mode inactive disables all chunk  features     To enable the CRC checksum chunk   Use the Chunk Selector to select the CRC chunk   Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true   Once the CRC chunk is enabled  the camera will add a CRC chunk to each acquired image     To retrieve CRC information f
30.   and 9 3 1  added Sections 9 3 3  9 3 5  and 9 3 7    AW00015108000   5 Dec 2007 Changed the camera   s family name to  pilot    Modified the exposure start delay in Section 8 8 and the constants for the  max  frame rate formulas in Section 8 9 for the piA2400 12   AW00015109000   21 Dec 2007   Added guidelines for avoiding EMI and ESD problems in Section 2 3 1 on             page 40    Removed web link for further information on APIPA in Section 5 3 on  page 69    Corrected the voltage ranges relating to logic 0 and logic 1 in Section 7 7 1  on page 70    Added references to Application Notes AW000565xx000 in Section 8 3 1  on page 85 and Section 8 5 1 on page 95    Added binning information for the piA1000 48gm in Section 11 7    Added the Gamma feature in Section 11 11 on page 179    Added the Disable Parameter Limits feature in Section 11 13 on page 194   Added the Debouncer feature in Section 11 14 on page 195        Minor corrections throughout the manual        Basler pilot    229    Revision History       Doc  ID Number    Date    Changes       AW00015111000    15 Feb 2008    Added a note on the sensor characteristics of the piA1900 32gm gc in  Section 1 2 on page 2    Included the  Software Licensing Information  section on page 22    Moved the guidelines for avoiding EMI and ESD problems to Section 1 7 on  page 23    Included the warning related to code snippets in Section 1 9 on page 25   Transferred to following sections to the  Installation and Setup Guide for  
31.   and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     Basler pilot 191    Features    11 12 5Balance White Auto    Balance White Auto is an auto function and the  automatic  counterpart of the manual white balance  feature  The balance white auto function is only available on color models     The automatic white balance is a two step process  First  the Balance Ratio Abs parameter values  for red  green  and blue are each set to 1 5  Then  assuming a  gray world  model  the Balance  Ratio Abs parameter values are adjusted such that the average values for the  red  and  blue   pixels match the average value for the  green  pixels     The balance white auto function uses Auto Function AOI2 and can only be operated in the  once   mode of operation     If Auto Function AOI2 does not overlap the Image AOI  see the  Auto Function AOI  section  the  pixel data from Auto Function AOI2 will not be used to control the white balance of the image   However  as soon as the Balance White Auto function is set to  once  operation mode  the Balance  Ratio Abs parameter values for red  green  and blue are each set to 1 5  These settings will control  the white balance of the image     For information on the white balance feature  see Section 11 3 on page 155     To use the balance white auto function  carry out the following steps     1  Select Auto Function AOlI2   2  Set the postion and size of Auto Function AOl2   3  Enable the balance
32.   and the timer delay is  normally adjusted by setting the value of the Timer Delay Raw parameter  However  if you require  a delay time that is longer than what you can achieve by changing the value of the Timer Delay Raw  parameter alone  the Timer Delay Time Base Abs parameter can be used to change the delay time  base     The Timer Delay Time Base Abs parameter value sets the delay time base in us  The default is 1 us  and it can be changed in 1 us increments     Note that there is only one timer delay time base and it is used by all four of the available timers     You can set the Timer Delay Time Base Abs parameter value from within your application software  by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter  value     Camera TimerDelayTimebaseAbs SetValue  5             Basler pilot 143     O Control    Setting the Delay with an Absolute Value    You can also set the Timer delay by using an  absolute  value  This is accomplished by setting the  Timer Delay Abs parameter  The units for setting this parameter are us and the value can be set in  increments of 1 us     To set the delay for a timer using an absolute value     Use the Timer Selector to select a timer   Set the value of the Timer Delay Abs parameter   You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Delay Abs parameter value from within your    application software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to  set the selector and 
33.   the camera may be damaged when the absolute maximum is  exceeded                 Table 8  Voltage Requirements for the I O Input When Using a PLC Power and I O Cable    Basler pilot 71    Physical Interface    7 7 1 2 Line Schematic    The camera is equipped with two physical input lines designated as Input Line 1 and Input Line 2   The input lines are accessed via the 12 pin receptacle on the back of the camera     As shown in the I O line schematic  each input line is opto isolated  See the previous section for  input voltages and their significances  The absolute maximum input voltage is  30 0 VDC  The  current draw for each input line is between 5 and 15 mA     Figure 25 shows an example of a typical circuit you can use to input a signal into the camera     By default  Input Line 1 is assigned to receive an external hardware trigger  ExTrig  signal that can  be used to control the start of image acquisition     Your  12 Pin Gnd  Receptacle I          Input    Voltage   30 VDC  Absolute  Max     Camera  V O_In_1         Q  BF545C    ONonahRWD      Your  Gnd       In_1_ Ctrl          Fig  25  Typical Input Circuit    For more information about input line pin assignments and pin numbering  see Section 7 2 on  page 62    For more information about how to use an ExTrig signal to control acquisition start  see Section 8 3  on page 84    For more information about configuring the input lines  see Section 10 1 on page 137     72 Basler pilot    Physical lnterface    7 7 2 Outpu
34.   the last pixel transmitted by the camera   Bg   the first byte in the buffer   Bm   the last byte in the buffer                                                                                        Byte Data   Bo U value for Po  B  Y value for Po  Bo V Value for Po  B3 Y value for P4  B4 U value for Po  Bs Y value for Ps  Be V Value for Ps  B7 Y value for P3  Bg U value for P4  Bg Y value for P4  Bio V Value for Py  By  Y value for Ps  Bm 7 U value for Ph 3  Bm 6 Y value for Ph 3  Bm 5 V Value for Ph 3  Bm 4 Y value for Ph 2  Bm 3 U value for P     Bm 2 Y value for P  4  Bm 1 V Value for Ph 4  Bm Y value for Ph   130    Basler pilot    Pixel Data Formats    When the camera is set for YUV 4 2 2 Packed output  the pixel data output for the Y component is    8 bit data of the    unsigned char    type  The range of data values for the Y component and the  corresponding indicated signal levels are shown below                                This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level   Hexadecimal   Decimal    OxFF 255   OxFE 254   0x01 1   0x00 0             The pixel data output for the U component or the V component is 8 bit data of the    straight binary       type  The range of data values for a U or a V component and the corresponding indicated signal  levels are shown below                                                  This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level   Hexadecimal   Decimal    OxFF 127   OxFE 126   0x81 1   0x80 0   Ox7F  1   0x01  127   0x00  128          
35.  2 Green value for P  o  Bm 1 Green value for Ph 4 Bm 1 Red value for Ph 4  Bm Blue value for Ph Bm Green value for Ph                            Basler pilot 117    Pixel Data Formats    With the camera set for Bayer GB 8  the pixel data output is 8 bit data of the    unsigned char    type   The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in    the table below        This Data Value   Hexadecimal     Indicates This Signal Level   Decimal                                      OxFF 255   OxFE 254   0x01 1   0x00 0  118    Basler pilot    Pixel Data Formats    9 3 3 Bayer BG 8 Format  Equivalent to DCAM Raw 8     When a color camera is set for the Bayer BG 8 pixel data format  it outputs 8 bits of data per pixel  and the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way  So  for each pixel covered with a red  lens  you get 8 bits of red data  For each pixel covered with a green lens  you get 8 bits of green  data  And for each pixel covered with a blue lens  you get 8 bits of blue data   This type of pixel data  is sometimes referred to as  raw  output      The  BG  in the name Bayer BG 8 refers to the alignment of the colors in the Bayer filter to the pixels  in the acquired images  For even lines in the images  pixel one will be blue  pixel two will be green   pixel three will be blue  pixel four will be green  etc  For odd lines in the images  pixel one will be  green  pixel two will be red  pixel three will be green  pixel f
36.  5 1 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points    The cameras are manufactured with high precision  Planar  parallel  and angular sides guarantee  precise mounting with high repeatability     The camera   s dimensions in millimeters are as shown in the drawings below     Camera housings are equipped with four mounting holes on the top and four mounting holes on the  bottom as shown in the drawings     14 Basler pilot    2 x M3  4 5 deep          Photosensitive  surface of the  sensor             Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         Fig  11  Mechanical Dimensions  in mm     Basler pilot                   iS      BottomSide   jfi  N  97   80 2 2 x M3  4 deep  6 45   2x M2  4 5 deep     10  B 4 I   x ilot E      N En ia a   pi  lt    p 5 N  a    R    pe 85 3 ma        S 86 7 al 32    98 5  17 5 2 x M3  3 5 deep    d  Eb pee eal  N  X  2 x M3  4 5 deep  9 7 ps 80 2 FA    15    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    1 5 1 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy    The sensor positioning accuracy is as shown in the drawings below     X  04   0 25                                                                                                0 75                  To the 
37.  5 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm  with lens adapter and connectors        104 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm  without front module or connectors   110 mm x 44 mm x 41 8 mm  with front module and connectors        Weight   standard housing      90   head housing       220 g  typical          240 g  typical        Conformity          CE  FCC  GenlCam  GigE Vision  IP30          Table 3  General Specifications    Basler pilot    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    1 3 Spectral Response for Mono Cameras    The following graphs show the spectral response for each available monochrome camera model     Note  The spectral response curves exclude lens characteristics and light source  characteristics     0 6       0 5       0 4       0 3       0 2    Absolute Quantum Efficiency       0 1    0 0 E  300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100                         Wave Length  nm     Fig  1  piA640 210gm Spectral Response    8 Basler pilot    0 50    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions       0 45       0 40       0 35       0 30       0 25       0 20       0 15    Absolute Quantum Efficiency       0 10       0 05    0 00  300       400       500    Fig  2  piA1000 48gm Spectral Response    0 6          600  Wave Length  nm     700       800       900    1000       0 5       0 4       0 3       0 2    Absolute Quantum Efficiency       0 1    0 0  200       300       400       500    Fig  3  piA1600 35gm Spectral Response    Basler pilot          600 700    Wave Length  nm        800       
38.  600 700 800 900 1000 1100    Wave Length  nm     Fig  6  piA640 210gc Spectral Response    Basler pilot    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    Absolute Quantum Efficiency    Fig     Absolute Quantum Efficiency    Fi     amp     7    45    40    35    30    25    20    15    10    350 400    0 45    0 40    0 35    0 30    0 25    0 20    0 15    0 10    0 05    400                                     450    500         piA1000 48gc Spectral Response             550 600 650       Wave Length  nm                    850 900             950 1000                         500      8  piA1600 35gc Spectral Response         gw       E  s         600 700    Wave Length  nm        800       900    1000    Basler pilot    0 40       0 35    0 30          0 25       0 20       oO     oa       0 10    Absolute Quantum Efficiency       Fig  9  piA1900 32gc Spectral Response    1 0                700    Wave Length  nm              0 9    0 8          0 7          0 6       0 5       0 4    Relative Response       0 3       0 2       0 1    0 0    400                550  Wave Length  nm     Fig  10  piA2400 12gc and piA2400 17gc Spectral Response    Basler pilot          Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    13    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    1 5 Mechanical Specifications    1 5 1 Standard Housing    The camera housing conforms to protection class IP30 provided the lens mount is covered by alens  or by the cap that is shipped with the camera     1
39.  AOI size are not allowed on the fly     Basler pilot 165    Features    11 7 Binning       Note  The binning feature is only available on the monochrome cameras     Binning increases the camera   s response to light by summing the charges from adjacent pixels into  one pixel  Two types of binning are available  vertical binning and horizontal binning     With vertical binning  adjacent pixels from 2 lines  3 lines  or a maximum of 4 lines in the imaging  sensor array are summed and are reported out of the camera as a single pixel  Figure 45 illustrates  vertical binning     Vertical Binning by 2 Vertical Binning by 3 Vertical Binning by 4                                                                                                                                  Co  Go  coagaag  Goo                                                                                                       a  3                                                                                                          mort  cs al ems G r ey oases    os 1 sea A f man S ams EA              Fig  45  Vertical Binning    With horizontal binning  adjacent pixels from 2 columns  3 columns  or a maximum of 4 columns are  summed and are reported out of the camera as a single pixel  Figure 46 illustrates horizontal bin   ning                                                                                                                                                                                           
40.  Changing the Duration Time Base    By default  the Timer Duration Time Base is fixed at 1 us  and the timer duration is normally adjusted  by setting the value of the Timer Duration Raw parameter  However  if you require a duration time  that is longer than what you can achieve by changing the value of the Timer Duration Raw  parameter alone  the Timer Duration Time Base Abs parameter can be used to change the duration  time base     The Timer Duration Time Base Abs parameter value sets the duration time base in us  The default  is 1 us and it can be changed in 1 us increments     Note that there is only one timer duration time base and it is used by all four of the available timers     You can set the Timer Duration Time Base Abs parameter value from within your application  software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the  parameter value        Camera TimerDurationTimebaseAbs SetValue  5       Setting the Duration with an Absolute Value    You can also set the Timer duration by using an  absolute  value  This is accomplished by setting  the Timer Duration Abs parameter  The units for setting this parameter are us and the value can be  set in increments of 1 us     To set the duration for a timer using an absolute value     Use the Timer Selector to select a timer   Set the value of the Timer Duration Abs parameter     You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Duration Abs parameter value from within your  application soft
41.  Checking the State of the I O Lines    10 3 1 Checking the State of a Single Output Line    You can determine the current state of an individual output line  To check the state of a line     Use the Line Selector parameter to select an output line   Read the value of the Line Status parameter to determine the current state of the selected line     A value of true means the line   s state is currently high and a value of false means the line   s  state is currently low     You can set the Line Selector and read the Line Status parameter value from within your application  software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the  selector and read the parameter value        Select output line 2 and read the state  Camera LineSelector SetValue  LineSelector_Out2                bool outputLine2State   Camera LineStatus GetValue      For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference   You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     10 3 2 Checking the State of All Lines    You can determine the current state of all input and output lines with a single operation  To check  the state of all lines     Read the value of the Line Status All parameter     You can read the Line Status All parameter value from within your application software by using the  pylon API  Th
42.  Features       retrieve data from the chunk    IChunkParser  amp ChunkParser    Camera CreateChunkParser           GrabResult Result    StreamGrabber RetrieveResult  Result      ChunkParser AttachBuffer   unsigned char   Result Buffer     Result GetPayloadSize         int64_t triggerinputCounter   Camera ChunkTriggerinputcounter GetValue      For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference   You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     Comparing Counter Chunk Data    When comparing trigger input counter data and frame counter data related to the same image  be  aware that the trigger input counter initially starts at 1 whereas the frame counter starts at 0   Therefore  the trigger input count will always be ahead of the matching frame count by one if both  counters were started at the same time and if an image was acquired for every trigger     Whenever the counters restart after having reached 4294967295 they will both start another  counting cycle at 0  Accordingly  the difference between matching counts will always be one   regardless of the number of counting cycles     Note that if both counters were started at the same time and not reset since and if the trigger input  counter is ahead of the matching frame counter by more than one  the camera was overtriggered  and not all external tr
43.  GB 8 refers to the alignment of the colors in the Bayer filter to the pixels  in the acquired images  For even lines in the images  pixel zero will be green  pixel one will be blue   pixel two will be green  pixel three will be blue  etc  For odd lines in the images  pixel zero will be  red  pixel one will be green  pixel two will be red  pixel three will be green  etc     For more information about the Bayer filter  see Section 9 3 1 on page 115     The tables below describe how the data for the even lines and for the odd lines of a received frame  will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer GB 8 output     The following standards are used in the tables   Po   the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a line    P    the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a line    Bg   the first byte of data for a line    Bm   the last byte of data for a line                                                                                                          Even Lines Odd Lines   Byte Data Byte Data   Bo Green value for Po Bo Red value for Po   B4 Blue value for P4 B4 Green value for P4  Bo Green value for Po Bo Red value for Po   B3 Blue value for P3 B3 Green value for P3  By Green value for P4 By Red value for P4   Bs Blue value for Ps Bs Green value for P5  Bm 5 Green value for Ph 5 Bm 5 Red value for Pp 5  Bm 4 Blue value for Ph 4 Bm 4 Green value for Ph 4  Bm 3 Green value for P  3 Bm 3 Red value for P   3  Bm 2 Blue value for P   o Bm
44.  Offset parameter to 0  2  4  6  8  etc        On color cameras  we strongly recommend setting the X Offset  Y Offset  Width           Function AOI refer to the physical columns and lines in the sensor  But if binning  is enabled  monochrome cameras only   these parameters are set in terms of   virtual  columns and lines  i e  the settings for an Auto Function AOI will refer to  the binned lines and columns in the sensor and not to the physical lines in the  sensor as they normally would        Normally  the X Offset  Y Offset  Width  and Height parameter settings for an Auto                For more information about the concept of a  virtual sensor   see Section 11 7 1 on page 168     You can select an Auto Function AOI and set the X Offset  Y Offset  Width  and Height parameter  values for the Auto Function AOI from within your application software by using the pylon API  The  following code snippets illustrate using the API to select an Auto Function AOI and to get the  maximum allowed settings for the Width and Height parameters  The code snippets also illustrate  setting the X Offset  Y Offset  Width  and Height parameter values  As an example  Auto Function  AOI is selected     Basler pilot 185    Features       Select the appropriate auto function AOI for luminance statistics       Currently AutoFunctionAOISelector_AOI1 is predefined to gather       luminance statistics       Set  Camera  Camera  Camera  Camera    Camera    position and size of the auto function AOI   
45.  Ph 2 Bm 4 High byte of green value for P   o  Bm 3 Low byte of green value for P  4 Bm 3 Low byte of red value for P  4  Bm 2 High byte of green value for Ph 4 Bm 2 High byte of red value for Ph 4  Bm 1 Low byte of blue value for Ph Bm 1 Low byte of green value for Ph  Bm High byte of blue value for Ph Bm High byte of green value for Ph                         When the camera is set for Bayer GB 16  the pixel data output is 16 bit data of the    unsigned short   little endian     type  The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal  levels are as shown in the table below  Note that for 16 bit data  you might expect a value range  from 0x0000 to OxFFFF  However  with the camera set for Bayer GB 16 only 12 bits of the 16 bits  transmitted are effective  Therefore  the highest data value you will see is OxOFFF indicating a  signal level of 4095                                         This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level   Hexadecimal   Decimal   OxOFFF 4095  OxOFFE 4094  0x0001 1  0x0000 0  Note  When a camera that is set for Bayer GB 16 has only 12 bits effective  the    leader of transmitted frames will indicate Bayer GB 12 as the pixel format     122 Basler pilot    Pixel Data Formats    9 3 5 Bayer BG 16 Format  Equivalent to DCAM Raw 16     When a color camera is set for the Bayer BG 16 pixel data format  it outputs 16 bits of data per pixel  with 12 bits effective  The 12 bits of effective pixel data fill from the least significant bit  T
46.  Programmer s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     Basler pilot 179    Features    11 12 Auto Functions    11 12 11 Common Characteristics    Auto functions control image properties and are the  automatic  counterparts of certain features  such as the gain feature or the white balance feature  which normally require  manually  setting the  related parameter values  Auto functions are particularly useful when an image property must be  adjusted quickly to achieve a specific target value and when a specific target value must be kept  constant in a series of images     An Auto Function Area of Interest  Auto Function AOI  lets you designate a specific part of the  image as the base for adjusting an image property  Each auto function uses the pixel data from an  Auto Function AOI for automatically adjusting a parameter value and  accordingly  for controlling  the related image property  Some auto functions use their own individual Auto Function AOI and  some auto functions share a single Auto Function AOI     An auto function automatically adjusts a parameter value until the related image property reaches  a target value  Note that the manual setting of the parameter value is not preserved  For example   when the Gain Auto function adjusts the gain parameter value  the manually set gain parameter  value is not preserved     For 
47.  Selector to the Standard Factory Setup  High Gain Factory Setup or Auto  Functions Factory Setup     You can set the Default Set Selector from within your application software by using the pylon API   The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector     If you want to select the Standard Factory Setup        Camera DefaultSetSelector SetValue  DefaultSetSelector_Standard       If you want to select the High Gain Factory Setup        Camera DefaultSetSelector SetValue  DefaultSetSelector_HighGain       If you want to select the Auto Functions Factory Setup                                Camera DefaultSetSelector SetValue  DefaultSetSelector_AutoFunctions       Note   Selecting which factory setup will serve as the default set is only allowed when  the camera is idle  i e  when it is not acquiring images continuously or does not  have a single image acquisition pending    Selecting the Standard Factory Setup as the default set and then loading the  default set into the active set is a good course of action if you have grossly  misadjusted the settings in the camera and you are not sure how to recover   The standard factory setup is optimized for use in typical situations and will  provide good camera performance in most cases     222 Basler pilot    Features    11 21 3Loading a Saved Set or the Default Set  into the Active Set    If you have saved a configuration set into the camera   s non volatile memory  you can load the saved  set from the camera   
48.  Software trigger    80  Spectral response eee 8  speed and dupleX    seeen 51  standard factory setup            220  222  223  standard power and I O cable                   65  voltage requirements              0 68  70  startup parameter set              eee 224  Startup SOt       eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 221  224  StreSs 16St ritare aaan 21  SUPPO eceran id ee destnneeteceece ee eeeees 226  T  target VAlUC        ccccecceceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeteees 180  technical support  seese 225  temperate ocni rosiers 24  test image selector               eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 215    Basler pilot    TEST IMAGES         eeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeneneeeeees 215  time delay time base abs parameter        143  time stamp CHUNK nsere 205  timed exposure Mode    80  85  timer delay           esseseeseseeeeesseeeeeneneeeeees 144  timer delay abs parametet               006 144  timer delay raw parameter    143  timer delay time           ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 143  timer delay time base            eee 143  timer duration              cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 144  timer duration abs parameter                   145  timer duration raw parameter                   144  timer duration time base             eeee 144  timer duration time base abs parameter 145  timer Selector   142  143  145  timer trigger source parameter                142  transition threshold           ccceeeeeeeeees 70  71  transmission start delay    eee 99  trigger Celay          esseeeseseeessseeeeeseeeneeees 197  trigger inpu
49.  The interpolation and conversion algorithms are applied to the averaged pixel  values when the averaging feature is used     Basler pilot 133    Pixel Data Fo    9 3 10 Mono 8 Format  Equivalent to DCAM Mono 8     rmats    When a color camera is set for the Mono 8 pixel data format  the pixel values in each captured  image are first interpolated and converted to the YUV color model as described for the YUV 4 2 2  Packed format  The camera then transmits the 8 bit Y value for each pixel to the host PC  In the  YUV color model  the Y component for each pixel represents a brightness value  This brightness  value can be considered as equivalent to the value that would be sent from a pixel in a monochrome  camera  So in essence  when a color camera is set for Mono 8  it outputs an 8 bit monochrome    image   This type of output is sometimes referred to as  Y Mono 8       The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer    in your PC when a color camera is set for Mono 8 output   The following standards are used in the table    Po   the first pixel transmitted by the camera   Ph   the last pixel transmitted by the camera   Bg   the first byte in the buffer   Bm   the last byte in the buffer                                                          Byte Data   Bo Y value for Po  B4 Y value for P4  Bo Y value for Po  B3 Y value for P3  By Y value for P4  Bs Y value for P5  Be Y value for Pg  B7 Y value for P7  Bm 3 Y value for Ph 3
50.  The mechanisms are independent from each other and can be used separately  However  for  maximum efficiency and for ensuring that resend requests will be sent for all missing packets  we  recommend using both resend mechanisms in a specific  optimized combination  as provided by  the parameter default values     The performance driver   s parameter values determine how the resend mechanisms act and how  they relate to each other  You can set the parameter values by using the pylon Viewer or from within  your application software by using the pylon API     Note     The parameter default values will provide for the following     The threshold resend mechanism precedes the timeout resend  mechanism  This ensures that a resend request is sent for every missing  packet  even at very high rates of arriving packets     The timeout resend mechanism will be effective for those missing packets  that were not resent after the first resend request     We strongly recommend using the default parameter settings  Only users  with the necessary expertise should change the default parameter values     The Basler performance driver uses a  receive window  to check the status of packets  The check  for missing packets is made as packets enter the receive window  If a packet arrives from higher in  the sequence of packets than expected  the preceding skipped packet or packets are detected as  missing  For example  suppose packet  n 1  has entered the receive window and is immediately  followed 
51.  and 5 as good way to check the effect of using  a digital feature such as the luminance lookup table     Enabling a Test Image  The Test Image Selector is used to set the camera to output a test image  You can set the value of  the Test Image Selector to one of the test images or to  test image off      You can set the Test Image Selector from within your application software by using the pylon API   The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the selector        set for no test image    Camera TestImageSelector SetValue  TestImageSelector_Off             set for the first test image       Camera TestImageSelector SetValue  TestImageSelector_Testimagel          For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     Basler pilot 215    Features    Test Image 1   Fixed Diagonal Gray Gradient  8 bit     The 8 bit fixed diagonal gray gradient test image is best suited for use when the camera is set for  monochrome 8 bit output  The test image consists of fixed diagonal gray gradients ranging from 0  to 255     If the camera is set for 8 bit output and is operating at full resolution  test image one will look similar  to Figure 56     The mathematical expression for this test image     Gray Value    column number   row number  MOD 256     
52.  and that the camera is set for  the timed exposure mode     As Figure 38 shows  there is a slight delay between the rise of the ExTrig signal and the start of  exposure  After the exposure time for an image acquisition is complete  the camera begins reading  out the acquired image data from the sensor into a buffer in the camera  When the camera has  determined that a sufficient amount of image data has accumulated in the buffer  it will begin  transmitting the data from the camera to the host PC     This buffering technique avoids the need to exactly synchronize the clock used for sensor readout  with the data transmission over your Ethernet network  The camera will begin transmitting data  when it has determined that it can safely do so without over running or under running the buffer   This buffering technique is also an important element in achieving the highest possible frame rate  with the best image quality     The exposure start delay is the amount of time between the point where the trigger signal  transitions and the point where exposure actually begins     The frame readout time is the amount of time it takes to read out the data for an acquired image  from the sensor into the image buffer     The frame transmission time is the amount of time it takes to transmit the acquired image from  the buffer in the camera to the host PC via the network     The transmission start delay is the amount of time between the point where the camera begins  reading out the acquired 
53.  by the parameter value  For example  if the  parameter is set to 10  the trigger ready signal will go high 10 times per second    If the value of the parameter is greater than the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate with  the current camera settings  the trigger ready signal will work as described above and will go  high at a point that represents the maximum acquisition frame rate allowed     Note  If you attempt to start an image acquisition when the trigger ready signal is low   the camera will simply ignore the attempt     The trigger ready signal will only be available when hardware triggering is  enabled     By default  the trigger ready signal is assigned to physical output line 2 on the camera  However   the assignment of the trigger signal to a physical output line can be changed     For more information about changing the assignment of camera output signals to physical output  lines  see Section 10 2 1 on page 139     For more information about the electrical characteristics of the camera   s output lines  see  Section 7 7 2 on page 73     Basler pilot 97    Image Acquisition Control    8 7 Exposure Active Signal    The camera   s    exposure active     ExpAc  signal goes high when the exposure time for each image  acquisition begins and goes low when the exposure time ends as shown in Figure 37  This signal  can be used as a flash trigger and is also useful when you are operating a system where either the  camera or the object being imaged is movable  For examp
54.  can set these parameter values from within your application software by using the pylon API   The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values        Camera TriggerSelector SetValue  TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart       Camera TriggerMode SetValue  TriggerMode_On             Camera TriggerSource SetValue   TriggerSource_Linel             Camera TriggerActivation SetValue  TriggerActivation_RisingEdge       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     Basler pilot 87    Image Acquisition Control    8 3 3 Acquiring a Single Image by Applying One  Hardware Trigger Transition    You can set the camera to react to a single transition of an external hardware trigger  ExTrig  signal  and then you can transition the ExTrig signal to begin image acquisition  When you are using an  ExTrig signal to start image acquisition  you should monitor the camera   s trigger ready  TrigRdy   output signal and you should base the use of your ExTrig signal on the state of the trigger ready  signal     To set the camera to react to a single ExTrig signal transition  follow the sequence below  The  sequence assumes that you have set the camera for rising edge triggering and for the timed  exposure mode    1  Access the camera   s A
55.  dirty  way to check the maximum packet size for your network  with its current configuration     1  Open the pylon Viewer  select a camera  and set the Packet Size param   eter to a low value  1 kB for example      2  Use the Continuous Shot mode to capture several images     3  Gradually increase the value of the Packet Size parameter and capture a  few images after each size change     4  When your Packet Size setting exceeds the packet size that the network  can handle  the viewer will lose the ability to capture images   When you  use Continuous Shot  the viewer   s status bar will indicate that it is  acquiring images  but the image in the viewing area will appear to be  frozen      52 Basler pilot    Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth    Step 3   Set the Bandwidth Reserve parameter for each camera     The Bandwidth Reserve parameter setting for a camera determines how much of the bandwidth  assigned to that camera will be reserved for lost packet resends and for asynchronous traffic such  as commands sent to the camera  If you are operating the camera in a relatively EMI free  environment  you may find that a bandwidth reserve of 2  or 3  is adequate  If you are operating  in an extremely noisy environment  you may find that a reserve of 8  or 10  is more appropriate     Step 4   Calculate the  data bandwidth needed  by each camera     The objective of this step is to determine how much bandwidth  in Byte s  each camera needs to  transmit the imag
56.  driver are described below   Enable Resend   Enables or disables the packet resend mechanism     If packet resend is disabled and the filter driver detects that a packet has been lost during  transmission  the grab result for the returned buffer holding the image will indicate that the grab  failed and the image will be incomplete     If packet resend is enabled and the driver detects that a packet has been lost during transmission   the driver will send a resend request to the camera  If the camera still has the packet in its buffer  it  will resend the packet  If there are several lost packets in a row  the resend requests will be  combined     Packet Timeout   The Packet Timeout parameter defines how long  in milliseconds  the filter driver  will wait for the next expected packet before it initiates a resend request     Frame Retention   The Frame Retention parameter sets the timeout  in milliseconds  for the frame  retention timer  Whenever the filter driver detects the leader for a frame  the frame retention timer  starts  The timer resets after each packet in the frame is received and will timeout after the last  packet is received  If the timer times out at any time before the last packet is received  the buffer for  the frame will be released and will be indicated as an unsuccessful grab     You can set the filer driver parameter values from within your application software by using the pylon  API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to read and writ
57.  event adapter object of the event grabber can be used to parse the information contained within  each event message     You can enable event reporting  create a pylon event grabber  and use the event adapter object  from within your application software by using the pylon API  The pylon software development kit  includes a  Camera Events  code sample that illustrates the entire process     For more detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s  Guide and API Reference     214 Basler pilot    Features    11 19 Test Images    All cameras include the ability to generate test images  Test images are used to check the camera   s  basic functionality and its ability to transmit an image to the host PC  Test images can be used for  service purposes and for failure diagnostics  For test images  the image is generated internally by  the camera   s logic and does not use the optics  the imaging sensor  or the ADC  Six test images are  available     The Effect of Camera Settings on Test Images    When any of the test image is active  the camera   s analog features such as gain  black level  and  exposure time have no effect on the images transmitted by the camera  For test images 1  2  3 and  6  the cameras digital features  such as the luminance lookup table  will also have no effect on the  transmitted images  But for test images 4 and 5  the cameras digital features will affect the images  transmitted by the camera  This makes test images 4
58.  for a 8 bit pixel format and no digital shift   Check the output of the camera under your normal lighting conditions and note the readings for the  brightest pixels    If any of the readings are above 128  do not use digital shift    If all of the readings are below 128  you can safely use the shift by 1 setting    If all of the readings are below 64  you can safely use the shift by 1 or 2 settings    If all of the readings are below 32  you can safely use the shift by 1  2  or 3 settings    If all of the readings are below 16  you can safely use the shift by 1  2  3  or 4 settings     11 4 4 Enabling and Setting Digital Shift    You can enable or disable the digital shift feature by setting the value of the Digital Shift parameter   When the parameter is set to zero  digital shift will be disabled  When the parameter is set to 1  2   3  or 4  digital shift will be set to shift by 1  shift by 2  shift by 3  or shift by 4 respectively     You can set the Digital Shift parameter values from within your application software by using the  pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values        Disable digital shift  Camera DigitalShift SetValue  0          Enable digital shift by 2  Camera DigitalShift SetValue  2          160 Basler pilot    Features    For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide  and API Reference   You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set 
59.  for the odd lines of a received frame  will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer GB 12 Packed  output     The following standards are used in the tables    Po   the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a line  Pa   the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a line  Bo   the first byte of data for a line    Bm   the last byte of data for a line                                                                                  Even Lines   Byte Data   Bo Green value for Pg bits 11     4   B  Blue value for P  bits 3     0 Green value for Pg bits 3     0  Bo Blue value for P4 bits 11     4   B3 Green value for Po bits 11     4   By Blue value for P3 bits 3     0 Green value for P3 bits 3     0  Bs Blue value for P3 bits 11    4   Be Green value for P4 bits 11    4   B7 Blue value for Ps bits 3     0 Green value for P4 bits 3     0  Bg Blue value for Ps bits 11     4   Bm 5 Green value for Ph 3 bits 11     4   Bm 4 Blue value for Ph 2 bits 3     0 Green value for P  3 bits 3     0  Bm 3 Blue value for P   o bits 11    4   Bm 2 Green value for Ph 1 bits 11     4   Bm 1 Blue value for Ph bits 3     0 Green value for Py  bits 3     0  Bm Blue value for Ph bits 11     4                Basler pilot 125    Pixel Data Formats                                                                                           Odd Lines   Byte Data   Bo Red value for Pg bits 11     4   B  Green value for P4 bits 3     0 Red value for Pp bits 3     0  Bo Gr
60.  gc models        Basler pilot    231       Revision History       Doc  ID Number    Date    Changes       AW00015116000          17 June 2009       Added information  drawings inclusive  about the 90   head housing variant  in Section 1 on page 1    The designations of the Kodak sensors were indicated more specifically by  adding  M  and  CM  for mono and color sensors  respectively  in   Section 1 2 on page 2    Added maximum sensor tilt angles for the piA2400 17gm gc in Figure 12 on  page 16 and Figure 14 on page 19    Indicated the relevance of spectral response curves for the piA2400 17gm   gc in Section 1 3 on page 8 and Section 1 4 on page 11    Section 2 on page 27  and Section 3 on page 29  and have been revised to  reflect that the pylon driver package can now be downloaded from the  website    Updated the minimum allowed exposure times in Section 8 4 on page 91   Added the digital shift feature in Section 11 4 on page 156    Corrected the indications of x offset and y offset in Figure 44 in Section 11 6  on page 163 and in Figure 51 in Section 11 12 1 2 on page 182    Added the reverse X feature in Section 11 8 on page 170    Removed the statement that auto functions have no effect on frame rate in  Section 11 12 1 on page 180 and added a note that frame rate may be  affected if exposure auto is used in Section 11 12 3 on page 189    Added a reference to the reverse X feature in Section 11 12 1 2 on   page 182    Replaced  Auto Gain Raw  by the correct  Gain Raw  A
61.  image acquisition will be controlled by issuing a software  trigger  The software trigger is issued by executing a Trigger Software command     Image acquisition starts when the Trigger Software command is executed  The exposure time for  each image is determined by the value of the camera   s exposure time parameter  Figure 30  illustrates image acquisition with a software trigger     Software Trigger Issued    Image    Acquisition     H  Exposure     duration determined by the  exposure time parameters     Fig  30  Image Acquisition with a Software Trigger    When controlling image acquisition with a software trigger  you can set the camera so that it will  react to a single software trigger or so that it will react to a continuous series of software triggers     8 2 1 Enabling the Software Trigger Feature    To enable the software trigger feature     Use the camera   s Trigger Selector parameter to select the Acquisition Start trigger   Use the camera   s Trigger Mode parameter to set the mode to On    Use the camera   s Trigger Source parameter to set the trigger source to Software   Use the Exposure Mode parameter to set the exposure mode to timed     You can set these parameter values from within your application software by using the pylon API   The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values        Camera TriggerSelector SetValue  TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart          Camera TriggerMode SetValue  TriggerMode_On             Camera 
62.  include bit 7 ADC   through bit 0 from each ADC along with 4 Pee ted  ch Abe thet bl ten bes At  zeros as LSBs  ae a    The result of shifting 4 times is that the  output of the camera is effectively  multiplied by 16        lw    S  B   l lt     Shifted Four Times B       Basler pilot 157    Features    When the camera is set to shift by 4  the 4 least significant bits output from the camera for each  pixel value will be 0  This means that the gray value scale will only include every 16th gray value   for example  16  32  48  64  and so on     If the pixel values being output by the camera   s sensor are high enough to set bit 8  bit 9  bit 10  or  bit 11 to 1  we recommend not using shift by 4  If you do nonetheless  all bits output from the camera  will automatically be set to 1  Therefore  you should only use the shift by 4 setting when your pixel  readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 256     11 4 2 Digital Shift with 8 Bit Pixel Formats    No Shift    As mentioned in the Functional Description section of  this manual  the camera uses 12 bit ADCs to digitize  the output from the imaging sensor  When the camera  is set for a pixel format that outputs pixel data at 8 bit ba ee ae ae ae ey ee  effective depth  by default  the camera drops the 4   least significant bits from each ADC and transmits the  8 most significant bits  bit 11 through 4      ADC         B Not Shifted B    4  gt        Shift by 1  When the camer
63.  is output from each ADC in the camera   Using the digital shift feature will effectively multiply the output of the camera by 2 times  4 times  8  times  or 16 times  The next two sections describe how the digital shift feature works when the  camera is set for a 12 bit pixel format and when it is set for a 8 bit pixel format  There is also a section  describing precautions that you must observe when using the digital shift feature and a section that  describes enabling and setting the digital shift feature     11 4 1 Digital Shift with 12 Bit Pixel Formats    No Shift    As mentioned in the Functional Description section of  this manual  the camera uses 12 bit ADCs to digitize  the output from the imaging sensor  When the camera  is set for a pixel format that outputs pixel data at 12 bit pit  apte M Ot en eae ee ae Git pi  effective depth  by default  the camera transmits the   12 bits that are output from each ADC     ADC       B No Shift B       Shift by 1    When the camera is set to shift by 1  the output from  the camera will include bit 10 through bit 0 from    AD  each ADC along with a zero as an LSB        wele bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit  The result of shifting once is that the output of the i0 9 8  7  6 5 4 3 2 d  0  camera is effectively multiplied by 2  For example   assume that the camera is set for no shift  that it is          viewing a uniform white target  and that under these  S   S   s i   Hea B Shifted Once E  conditions the reading for 
64.  most cases  enabling a camera feature will simply change the behavior of the camera  The Test  Image feature is a good example of this type of camera feature  When the Test Image feature is  enabled  the camera outputs a test image rather than a captured image  This type of feature is  referred to as a  standard  feature     When certain camera features are enabled  the camera actually develops some sort of information  about each image that it acquires  In these cases  the information is added to each image as a  trailing data  chunk  when the image is transferred to the host PC  Examples of this type of camera  feature are the Frame Counter feature and the Time Stamp feature  When the Frame Counter  feature is enabled  for example  after an image is captured  the camera checks a counter that tracks  the number of images acquired and develops a frame counter stamp for the image  And if the Time  Stamp feature is enabled  the camera creates a time stamp for the image  The frame counter stamp  and the time stamp would be added as  chunks  of trailing data to each image as the image is  transferred from the camera  The features that add chunks to the acquired images are referred to  as    chunk    features     Before you can use any of the features that add chunks to the image  you must make the chunk  mode active  Making the chunk mode active is described in the next section     Basler pilot 199    Features    11 17 2Making the  Chunk Mode  Active and Enabling  the Extended D
65.  on page 20        A    CAUTION     gt     CAUTION    Basler pilot    Voltage Outside of Specified Range Can Cause Damage    If the voltage of the power to the camera is greater than  30 0 VDC damage  to the camera can result  If the voltage is less than  11 3 VDC  the camera  may operate erratically     An Incorrect Plug Can Damage the 12 pin Connector    The plug on the cable that you attach to the camera   s 12 pin connector must  have 12 pins  Use of a smaller plug  such as one with 10 pins or 8 pins  can  damage the pins in the camera   s 12 pin connector     Inappropriate Code May Cause Unexpected Camera Behavior    The code snippets provided in this manual are included as sample code only   Inappropriate code may cause your camera to function differently than  expected and may compromise your application     To ensure that the snippets will work properly in your application  you must  adjust them to meet your specific needs and must test them thoroughly prior to  use     25    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    Warranty Precautions    To ensure that your warranty remains in force     Do not remove the camera   s serial number label   If the label is removed and the serial number can   t be read from the camera   s registers  the warranty  is void    Do not open the camera housing    Do not open the housing  Touching internal components may damage them     Keep foreign matter outside of the camera   Be careful not to allow liquid  flammable  or metallic ma
66.  output line with an LED or an opto   coupler  In this example  the voltage for the external circuit is  24 VDC  Current in the circuit is  limited by an external resistor  The circuit in Figure 27 is monitoring output line 1             Q  Out_1_ Ctrl BC847BS    Your Gnd    VO_Out_1    ONOoRWND      V O_Out_VCC    Camera 424 VDC          12 Pin Your Gnd  Receptacle    Fig  27  Typical LED Output Signal at  24 VDC for the External Circuit  Example     By default  the camera   s exposure active  ExpAc  signal is assigned to Output Line 1  The exposure  active signal indicates when exposure is taking place     By default  the camera   s trigger ready  TrigRdy  is assigned to Output Line 2  The trigger ready  signal goes high to indicate the earliest point at which exposure start for the next frame can be  triggered     The assignment of camera output signals to physical output lines can be changed by the user     For more information about output line pin assignments and pin numbering  see Section 7 2 on  page 62     For more information about the exposure active signal  see Section Section 8 7 on page 98   For more information about the trigger ready signal  see Section Section 8 6 on page 96     For more information about assigning camera output signals to physical output lines  see  Section 10 2 1 on page 139     74 Basler pilot    Physical Interface    7 7 3 Output Line Response Time    Response times for the output lines on the camera are as shown below     Camera  Output 
67.  piA640 210gm     Device Manufacturer Info  read only    can contain some information about the camera  manufacturer  This string usually indicates  none      Device Version  read only    contains the device version number for the camera   Firmware Version  read only    contains the version of the firmware in the camera   Device ID  read only    contains the serial number of the camera     Device User ID  read   write    is used to assign a user defined name to a device  This name  will be displayed in the Basler pylon Viewer and the Basler pylon IP Configuration Tool  The  name will also be visible in the  friendly name  field of the device information objects returned  by pylon   s device enumeration procedure     Device Scan Type  read only    contains the scan type of the camera  for example  area scan   Sensor Width  read only    contains the physical width of the sensor in pixels    Sensor Height  read only    contains the physical height of the sensor    Max Width  read only    Indicates the camera   s maximum area of interest  AOI  width setting   Max Height  read only    Indicates the camera   s maximum area of interest  AOI  height setting     You can read the values for all of the device information parameters or set the value of the Device  User ID parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API  The following code  snippets illustrate using the API to read the parameters or write the Device User ID        Read the Vendor Name parameter    P
68.  set the state of the user settable outputs  If a bit is 0  it will set the state  of the associated output to low  If a bit is high  it will set the state of the associated port to high     Sets user output 4 state  Sets user output 3 state  Sets user output 2 state  Sets user output 1 state     34 30 29 28 27 26 25  24 23 22 21  20  19  18  17  16  15  14  13  12  14 10  9  8  7  6  5 4 3 2  1 0   L      Not used j             LSB    Fig  40  User Output Value All Parameter Bits    140 Basler pilot    I O Control    To set the state of multiple user settable output lines   Use the User Output Value All parameter to set the state of multiple user settable outputs     You can set the User Output Value All parameter from within your application software by using the  pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter     Camera UserOutputValueAll SetValue  0x3     int64_t currentOutputState   Camera UserOutputValueAll GetValue           Note  If you have the invert function enabled on an output line that is designated as  user settable  the user setting sets the state of the line before the inverter     10 2 3 Setting an Output Line for Invert    You can set each individual output line to invert or not to invert the outgoing signal  To set the invert  function on an output line     Use the Line Selector to select an output line     Set the value of the Line Inverter parameter to true to enable inversion on the selected line and  to false to di
69.  table below        This Data Value   Hexadecimal     Indicates This Signal Level   Decimal                                      OxFF 255   OxFE 254   0x01 1   0x00 0  120    Basler pilot    Pixel Data Formats    9 3 4 Bayer GB 16 Format  Equivalent to DCAM Raw 16     When a color camera is set for the Bayer GB 16 pixel data format  it outputs 16 bits of data per pixel  with 12 bits effective  The 12 bits of effective pixel data fill from the least significant bit  The four  unused most significant bits are filled with zeros     With the Bayer GB 16 the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way  So  for each pixel  covered with a red lens  you get 12 effective bits of red data  For each pixel covered with a green  lens  you get 12 effective bits of green data  And for each pixel covered with a blue lens  you get 12  effective bits of blue data   This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as  raw  output      The  GB  in the name Bayer GB 16 refers to the alignment of the colors in the Bayer filter to the  pixels in the acquired images  For even lines in the images  pixel zero will be green  pixel one will  be blue  pixel two will be green  pixel three will be blue  etc  For odd lines in the images  pixel zero  will be red  pixel one will be green  pixel two will be red  pixel three will be green  etc     For more information about the Bayer filter  see Section 9 3 1 on page 115     The tables below describe how the data for the even lines and for the odd li
70.  text assume that you are using an  external trigger to trigger image acquisition  The example also assumes that the camera is  operating in a poor environment  so many packets are lost and many resends are required  The  numbered text is keyed to the time periods in the chart     Basler pilot 45    Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth    Resends available    via the bandwidth 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5  reserve  Resends needed 0 7 4 10 20 1 0 0 1  Effect on the  accumulator pool 0  2  1  5  9  4  5  5  1  Resends left in the 15 13 14 9 0 4 9 14 15    accumulator pool    transmission            Time Period 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9   ef E a a e S a A  FA amp TI FA amp T     FA amp TI FA amp TI   FA amp T     FA amp T FA amp TI  FA amp T                                                          after frame                                        F A  amp  T    Frame Acquired Not enough       and Transmitted resends available         1     46    Packet unavailable  errors generated     You trigger image acquisition and during this time period  the camera acquires and transmits  a frame  The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period  but no  resends are needed  The accumulator pool started with 15 resends available and remains at  15     You trigger image acquisition and during this time period  the camera acquires and transmits  a frame  The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period  but 7  resends are needed  The 5 r
71.  that fit into the span between the resend  request threshold and the resend request batching threshold plus one     If the Resend Request Batching parameter is set to 0  no batching will occur and a resend request  will be sent for each single missing packet  For other settings  consider an example  Suppose the  Resend Request Batching parameter is set to 80 referring to a span between the resend request  threshold and the front end of the receive window that can hold five packets  Figure 16   In this case  4 packets  5 x 80   will fit into the span between the resend request threshold and the resend  request batching threshold  Accordingly  the maximum number of consecutive missing packets that  can be batched is 5  4   1      Basler pilot 35    Basler Network Drivers and Parameters    Timeout Resend Mechanism Parameters  The timeout resend mechanism is illustrated in Figure 17 where the following assumptions are  made     The frame includes 3000 packets    Packet 1002 is missing within the stream of packets and has not been recovered    Packets 2999 and 3000 are missing at the end of the stream of packets  end of the frame    The Maximum Number Resend Requests parameter is set to 3     DIAGRAM IS NOT DRAWN TO SCALE     1   2   3   5   7   9   11   12   13   Pod bd bk    i i AA bd    995  996  997  998  999  1000  1001  1003  1004  1005  1006  1007  1008  1009  1010  1011  1012  1013  1014  1015 D    a 2997  2998       Time    i     4   6   8   10   14                      
72.  the camera is monochrome or color  Table 12 lists the pixel formats available on each monochrome  camera model and Table 13 lists the pixel formats available on each color camera model                                                                       Mono Camera Mono 8 Mono 16 Mono 12 YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2  YUYV   Model Packed Packed Packed  piA640 210gm e e           piA1000 48gm e e           piA1600 35gm e    e    e  piA1900 32gm    e e    e  piA2400 12gm e e           piA2400 17gm                 Table 12  Pixel Formats Available on Monochrome Cameras       format available   Color Camera Mono 8   Bayer Bayer Bayer Bayer   Bayer   Bayer YUV YUV  Model GB 8 BG 8 GB 16 BG 16 GB 12 BG 12 4 2 2 4 2 2  Packed   Packed   Packed    YUYV   Packed  piA640 210gc             o     piA1000 48gc                e  piA1600 35gc       e           piA1900 32gc e e    e    e  piA2400 12gc    e e       e  piA2400 17gc                                                          Table 13  Pixel Formats Available on Color Cameras       format available     Basler pilot    107    Pixel Data Formats    Details of the monochrome formats are described in Section 9 2 on page 109 and details of the  color formats are described in Section 9 3 on page 115     You can set the Pixel Format parameter value from within your application software by using the  pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value     Camera PixelFormat SetValue  PixelFormat_Monos       C
73.  the end of the frame  2999 and 3000     12  Interval defined by the Packet Timeout parameter     You can set the performance driver parameter values from within your application software by using  the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to read and write the parameter  values        Get the Stream Parameters object    Camera_t  StreamGrabber_t StreamGrabber  Camera GetStreamGrabber  0           Write the ReceiveWindowSize parameter    StreamGrabber ReceiveWindowSize SetValue  16          Disable packet resends    StreamGrabber EnableResend SetValue  false                   Write the PacketTimeout parameter  StreamGrabber PacketTimeout SetValue  40                Write the ResendRequestThreshold parameter       StreamGrabber ResendRequestThreshold SetValue  5                Write the ResendRequestBatching parameter       StreamGrabber ResendRequestBatching SetValue  10          Write the ResendTimeout parameter       StreamGrabber ResendTimeout SetValue  2             Write the ResendRequestResponseTimeout parameter       StreamGrabber ResendRequestResponseTimeout SetValue  2             Write the MaximumNumberResendRequests parameter       StreamGrabber MaximumNumberResendRequests SetValue  25     For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters   Note that the  performance driver parameters wil
74.  white auto function by setting it to  once      You can carry out steps 1 to 3 from within your application software by using the pylon API  The  following code snippet illustrates using the API to use the auto function   Selecting and setting Auto Function AOI2  See the  Auto Function AOI  section above   Enabling the balance white auto function and selecting the  once  mode of operation        Set AOI for white balance statistics     Currently AutoFunctionAOISelector_AOI2 is predefined to gather     white balance statistics       Set position and size of the auto function AOI       Camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue  AutoFunctionAOISelector_AOI2     Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetX SetValue  0     Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetY SetValue  0     Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue  Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax       Camera  AutoFunctionAOIHeight SetValue  Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax                  Set mode of operation for balance white auto function    Camera BalanceWhiteAuto SetValue  BalanceWhiteAuto_Once          192 Basler pilot    Features    For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters   For general information about auto functions  see Section 11 12 on page 180     For information about Auto Function AOls and how to set them  see Section 11 12 1 2 on page 182     Basler pilot 193    Features  
75.  will help to avoid large ground loops    Large ground loops can be a primary cause of EMI problems      Use a line filter on the main power supply     Install the camera and camera cables as far as possible from devices generating sparks  If  necessary  use additional shielding     Decrease the risk of electrostatic discharge by taking the following measures   Use conductive materials at the point of installation  e g   floor  workplace    Use suitable clothing  cotton  and shoes   Control the humidity in your environment  Low humidity can cause ESD problems     Note      The Basler application note called Avoiding EMI and ESD in Basler Camera  Installations provides much more detail about avoiding EMI and ESD   The application note can be downloaded at   www baslerweb com indizes download_index_en_31412 html    Basler pilot 23    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    1 8 Environmental Requirements    1 8 1 Temperature and Humidity    Housing temperature during operation  0 TC      50   C   32 F      122   F     Humidity during operation  20       80    relative  non condensing  Storage temperature   20   C      80   C   4 F      176   F   Storage humidity  20       80    relative  non condensing    1 8 2 Heat Dissipation    You must provide sufficient heat dissipation to maintain the temperature of the camera housing at  50 C or less  Since each installation is unique  Basler does not supply a strictly required technique  for proper heat dissipation  Instead  we 
76. 11     4                Basler pilot 127    Pixel Data Formats                                                                                           Odd Lines   Byte Data   Bo Green value for Po bits 11     4   B  Red value for P4 bits 3    0 Green value for Pg bits 3     0  Bo Red value for P4 bits 11    4   B3 Green value for Ps bits 11     4   By Red value for P3 bits 3    0 Green value for P3 bits 3     0  Bs Red value for P3 bits 11    4   Be Green value for P4 bits 11     4   B7 Red value for Ps bits 3     0 Green value for P4 bits 3     0  Bg Red value for Ps bits 11     4   Bm 5 Green value for Ph 3 bits 11     4   Bm 4 Red value for Pp    bits 3    0 Green value for Ph 3 bits 3     0  Bm 3 Red value for Ph 2 bits 11     4   Bm 2 Green value for P  4 bits 11    4   Bm 1 Red value for P  bits 3     0 Green value for Ph 1 bits 3    0  Bm Red value for P  bits 11     4          When a color camera is set for Bayer BG 12 Packed  the pixel data output is 12 bit data of the     unsigned    type  The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels  are as shown in the table below                                         This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level   Hexadecimal   Decimal   OxOFFF 4095  OxOFFE 4094  0x0001 1  0x0000 0  128    Basler pilot    Pixel Data Formats    9 3 8 YUV 4 2 2 Packed Format   Equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2     When a color camera is set for the YUV 422 Packed pixel data format  each pixel in the captured  image 
77. 1600 35gm gc                      Sensor Size gm  648 x 488 gm  1004 x 1004 gm  1608 x 1208    H x V pixels  gc  646 x 486 gc  1000 x 1000 ge  1604x1204   Sensor Type Kodak KAI 0340M CM Kodak KAI 1020M CM Kodak KAI 2020M CM  Progressive scan CCD   Optical Size 1 3  2 3  1    Pixel Size 7 4 um x 7 4 um 7 4 um x 7 4 um 7 4 um x 7 4 um   Max  Frame Rate 210 fps 48 fps 35 fps     at full resolution              Mono Color    All models available in mono or color       Data Output Type    Fast Ethernet  100 Mbit s  or Gigabit Ethernet  1000 Mbit s        Pixel Data Formats    Mono Models  Mono 8  equivalent to DCAM Mono 8    Mono 16  equivalent to DCAM Mono 16    Mono 12 Packed   YUV 4 2 2 Packed  equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2   YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  Packed   Mono 8  equivalent to DCAM Mono 8    Bayer GB 8  equivalent to DCAM Raw 8    Bayer GB 16  equivalent to DCAM Raw 16    Bayer GB 12 Packed   YUV 4 2 2 Packed  equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2   YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  Packed    Color Models        ADC Bit Depth    12 bits       Synchronization    Via external trigger signal or via software       Exposure Control    Programmable via the camera API       Camera Power  Requirements     12 to  24 VDC   min   11 3 VDC  absolute max   30 0 VDC     lt  1  ripple             4 5 W   12 VDC 4 2 W   12 VDC 4 8 W   12 VDC       I O Ports    2 opto isolated input ports and 4 opto isolated output ports          Lens Adapter       C mount       Basler pilot       Specifications  Requirements  and Precaution
78. 2  YUYV  Packed    Color Models        ADC Bit Depth    12 bits       Synchronization    Via external trigger signal or via software       Exposure Control    Programmable via the camera API       Camera Power  Requirements     12 to  24 VDC   min   11 3 VDC  absolute max   30 0 VDC     lt  1  ripple       4 4 W   12 VDC       1 0 Ports    2 opto isolated input ports and 4 opto isolated output ports       Lens Adapter          C mount          Basler pilot    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions       Specification piA1900 32gm gc       Size  L x W x H    standard housing    86 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm  without lens adapter or connectors   98 5 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm  with lens adapter and connectors         90   head housing    104 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm  without front module or connectors   110 mm x 44 mm x 41 8 mm  with front module and connectors        Weight   standard housing      220 g  typical         90   head housing      240 g  typical   Conformity CE  FCC  GenlCam  GigE Vision  IP30                   Table 2  General Specifications    Note      The sensor characteristics of the piA1900 32gm gc cameras do not entirely  conform to the quality standards generally adhered to by Basler  The sensitivity  to light for clusters of up to six contiguous pixels may deviate significantly from  the sensitivities of normal pixels     Basler pilot 5    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions       Specification    piA2400 12gm gc piA2400 17 gm gc                      Senso
79. 4    C gt     Where   AOI Height   the height of the acquired frames as determined by the AOI settings   The constants C4 and C gt  depend on the camera model as shown in the table below                                      C4 Co  piA640 210gm gc 8 76 Us 521 17 us  piA1000 48gm gc 13 39 us 7423 76 Us  piA1600 35gm gc 20 52 us 3873 2 us  piA1900 32gm gc  0 us 31021 26 us  piA2400 12gm gc 26 19 us 26210 09 us  piA2400 17 gm gc 20 94 us 15413 35 us         Note  The maximum frame rate of the piA1900 32gm gc is limited to 32 fps     Basler pilot 103    Image Acquisition Control    Formula 2     Calculates the maximum frame rate based on the exposure time for the acquired frames     Max  Frames s      Where     1  Exposure time in us   C3    The constant C3 depends on the camera model as shown in the table below                             C3  piA640 210gm gc 46 99 us  piA1000 48gm gc 95 57 us  piA1600 35gm gc 79 64 us  piA1900 32gm gc 139 38 us  piA2400 12gm gc 102 40 us  piA2400 17gm gc 81 92 us             For more information about setting the exposure time  see Section 8 4 on page 91     Formula 3     Calculates the maximum frame rate based on the frame transmission time     Max  Frames s            Device Current Throughput Parameter Value  Payload Size Parameter Value    Note    When the averaging feature is used  the above formula is replaced by the  related formula in the  Averaging  section  which may permit a higher  maximum acquisition frame rate     For the related fo
80. 4  1005  1006   1007  1008  1009   1010  1011  1012  1013  1014 ne 2997   2998                                                                                                                             gt     ri  r     4   6   8   12      ig  18  Combination of Threshold Resend Mechanism and Timeout Resend Mechanism     1  Stream of packets  Gray indicates that the status was checked as the packet entered the  receive window  White indicates that the status has not yet been checked     Receive window of the performance driver     Threshold for sending resend requests  resend request threshold   The first resend request  for packet 1002 is sent to the camera  The camera does not respond with a resend     Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter     G N    G S    The Resend Timeout interval expires and the second resend request for packet 1002 is sent  to the camera  The camera does not respond with a resend      6  Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter     7  The Resend Timeout interval expires and the third resend request for packet 1002 is sent to  the camera  The camera does not respond with a resend      8  Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter    38 Basler pilot    Basler Network Drivers and Parameters     9  Because the maximum number of resend requests has been sent and the last Resend  Response Timeout interval has expired  packet 1002 is now considered as lost      10  End of the frame    11  Missing packets at
81. 4 on page 91    190 Basler pilot    Features    11 12 4Auto Function Profile    If you want to use the gain auto function and the exposure auto function at the same time  you must  also set the auto function profile  The auto function profile assigns priorities between related auto  functions  The auto function profile specifies whether gain or exposure time shall be kept as low as  possible during adjustments until a target average gray value for the pixel data of the related Auto  Function AOI is reached     To use the gain auto function and the exposure auto function at the same time  carry out the  following steps     1  Set the auto function profile to specify whether gain or exposure time shall be minimized during  adjustments    2  Set the gain auto function to the  continuous  mode of operation    3  Set the exposure auto function to the  continuous  mode of operation    You can set the auto function profile from within your application software by using the pylon API    The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the auto function profile  As an example    Gain Auto is set to be minimized during adjustments           Use GainAuto and ExposureAuto simultaneously  Camera AutoFunctionProfile SetValue  AutoFunctionProfile_GainMinimum       Camera GainAuto SetValue  GainAuto_Continuous             Camera ExposureAuto SetValue  ExposureAuto_Continuous          For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide
82. 5  206  209  211  chunk time stamp parameter                  205  chunk trigger input counter parameter    206  chunk width parameter    ssec 200  cleaning the camera and sensot               26  code snippets  proper USE              eeeeee 25    235    Index    CONN fOr   2 2 chcocgtesepheialscdedceaezcpesscceaeislt 115   alignment      eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 116  configuration set loaded at startup          224  configuration Sets    220 224  CONMMOMMILY 22 20  ceecetsacadesiatikd diicaveavsoessa  3 5  7  connector typsnitt aeina 64  CONNECIOMS ie cticd in eiua ienee 61  GPU interrupts iseennast on aein 51  CRC checksum chunk scce 211  D  debouncer   and exposure start delay                 100   explai  e d ee 195   AIAT iets etd E EAEE TT 195   signal delay enecens 195  default configuration Set              eesseeeea 220  device current throughput parameter        48  device firmware version parametet         218  device ID parameter    218  device manufacturer info parameter        218  device max throughput parameter             47  device model name parameter                218  device scan type paramete                0  218  device user ID parameter    218  device vendor name parameter               218  device version parameter    218  Cigital Shift  iriaren 156  CIMENSIONS         ccc eeeeeee cess eeeeeees 3 5  7  14  17  disable parameter limits   explai  ed  siinset eiert 194  drivers  NEtWOFK          ccceeecccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 31  QUSE aa AE a
83. 78  frame readout time    n    99  frame retention parameter    32  frame transmission delay parameter         44  frame transmission time              eee 99  TEC  TUN Sececveeeeteliieactde secre deetticehadieals  78  Front MOCUIE         eeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeenees 17  functional description    57  G  gain   OXPIlAING iiir eienenn 149   SEWING inan ia N aai 149  JaN AUTO wi ile elaine 187  gain raw All    eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeees 149  gain raw tap  eenn 149  gain raw tap 2 si 149    Basler pilot    gamma Correction    179  H  heartbeat timeout parameter              0  41  heartbeat timer      eneerererrererrresreeee 41  heat dissipation    s e 24  high gain factory setup         eee 220  horizontal DINNING    eeeeeeeeee 166  horizontal mirror iMage    e 170  housing   90S head eiee a iaaa aaa iah 1 17   standard 0 0    cece ccccceecceceeeseeeeeeseaeeeeees 1 14  RUMIdI  Y riedia iiie ates ii edie aes 24     image distortion s e 168  image property   target value oo    eect eeeeteeeeeeneeeees 180  input lines   CONFIQUIING          i iaa eai 137   electrical characteristics              06 72   voltage requirements              006 70  71  installation   hardware  anana ra iekea aaa 27   SOMWAlC siiani ieee dashiiieieddiepeies 27  integrate enabled signal    98  inter packet delay          cceceeeeeseeeeeeneeeees 51  inverter   OUIPUTIINGS cade headed es  141  IP configuration tool    29  PIO eee ete peter a n errs 14 17  IR Cut filter c   11  20  162  J  jumbo FrAMES
84. 900       1000    1100    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    0 50  0 45  0 40  0 35  0 30                   0 25  0 20          0 15  0 10       Absolute Quantum Efficiency       0 05  0 00                      300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000    Wave Length  nm     Fi    g  4  piA1900 32gm Spectral Response    1 0 P       0 9       0 8  0 7          0 6       0 5 p       0 4  0 3       Relative Response       0 2    0 1                      0 0  400 500 600 700 800 900 1000    Wave Length  nm     Fig  5  piA2400 12gm and piA2400 17 gm Spectral Response    10 Basler pilot    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    1 4 Spectral Response for Color Cameras    The following graphs show the spectral response for each available color camera model           0 50    Note    The spectral response curves exclude lens characteristics  light source  characteristics  and IR cut filter characteristics     To obtain best performance from color models of the camera  use of a  dielectric IR cut filter is recommended  The filter should transmit in a range  from 400 nm to 700     720 nm  and it should cut off from 700     720 nm to  1100 nm     A suitable IR cut filter is included in the standard C mount lens adapter on  color models of the camera   An IR cut filter is not included in the optional CS   mount adapter         0 45       0 40       0 35       0 30       0 25          0 15       0 10    Absolute Quantum Efficiency       0 05                            400 500
85. 99 3 2 2 x M3  4 5 deep  ra     gt    z p gt    D a  amp      z _ 10  N  Top   c                                         2 x M3  3 5 deep    Fig  13  Mechanical Dimensions  in mm  for Cameras With 90   Head Housing    18 Basler pilot    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    1 5 2 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy    The sensor positioning accuracy for cameras equipped with 90   head housing is as shown in  Figure 14                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        X  0 4        center lines of the thread   0 25    ee eS   x      lo   lt   N        olo        i Hi  H     7 p  gt  sally  oO Li                 fe     O  eS   9 ik   9   8    l  l     l O o i O  to the length of the housing center lines of the sensor    gt    reference plane     tolerance to the center of the  lens mount  optical axis     gt    front module reference plane      tolerance to the reference planes  Photosensitive  surface of the  0 02  This is the sensor tilt tolerance  It applies to every point on the  sensor        photosensitive surface and is relative to the c
86. Basler pilot    AA        Ne    or       USER   S MANUAL FOR GigE VISION CAMERAS    Document Number  AW000151  Version  16 Language  000  English   Release Date  17 June 2009    For customers in the U S A     This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device   pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules  These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment  This  equipment generates  uses  and can radiate radio frequency energy and  if not installed and used  in accordance with the instruction manual  may cause harmful interference to radio  communications  Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful  interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense     You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could  void your authority to operate this equipment     The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual must be used with this equipment in  order to comply with the limits for a computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules     For customers in Canada    This apparatus complies with the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in Radio  Interference Regulations     Pour utilisateurs au Canada    Cet appareil est conforme aux normes Classe A pour bruits radio  lectriques  sp  cifi  es dans l
87. Cameras Used with Basler   s pylon API    Software and Hardware  Installation    Network Recommendations   and  Camera and Network  Adapter IP Configuration     Added the reference to the  Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used  with Basler   s pylon API  in Section 2 on page 27    Added the  Improve the Network Performance  step in Section 5 2 1 on  page 51    Corrected the minimum value for the Timer Delay Raw parameter and  indicated the minimum value for the Timer Delay Time Base Abs parameter  in Section 10 2 4 2 on page 143    Minor modifications and corrections throughout the manual        AW00015112000          5 Mar 2008       Modified mechanical drawings in Section 1 5 1 1 on page 14 and  Section 1 5 2 on page 17  dimensions  holes for screw lock connector    Added information on the input line transition threshold in Table 5 on  page 62    Added the maximum exposure times and related settings in Section 8 4 1  on page 92    Minor modifications and corrections throughout the manual        230    Basler pilot       Revision History                         Doc  ID Number   Date Changes  AW00015113000   18 Jul 2008 Expanded the voltage information in Section 1 2 on page 2   Updated the distances and related tolerances between the front of the lens  mount and the sensor   s photosensitive area in Figure 11 on page 15 and  Figure 12 on page 16   Added Information about mechanical stress test results in Section 1 5 4 on  page 21   Added Information about the lens t
88. Currently AutoFunctionAOISelector_AOI1 is predefined to gather      luminance statistics      Set position and size of the auto function AOI  Camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue  AutoFunctionAOISelector_AOIl1     Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetX SetValue  0     Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetY SetValue  0     Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue  Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax            Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight SetValue  Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax               Set exposure time limits for luminance control       Camera AutoExposureTimeAbsLowerLimit SetValue  1000                   Camera AutoExposureTimeAbsUpperLimit SetValue  1 0E6          Set target value for luminance control  This is always expressed          by an 8 bit value  regardless of the current pixel format     i e  0   gt  black  255   gt  white  Camera AutoTargetValue SetValue  128                Set mode of operation for exposure auto function             Camera ExposureAuto SetValue  ExposureAuto_Continuous  j        For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters   For general information about auto functions  see Section 11 12 on page 180   For information about Auto Function AOls and how to set them  see Section 11 12 1 2 on page 182     For information about minimum allowed and maximum possible exposure time  see Table 10 in  Section 8 
89. Guide  and API Reference contains an introduction to the API and includes information about all of the  methods and objects included in the API     The Basler pylon Software Development Kit  SDK  includes a set of sample programs that illustrate  how to use the pylon API to parameterize and operate the camera  These samples include  Microsoft   Visual Studio   solution and project files demonstrating how to set up the build  environment to build applications based on the API     The SDK is included in Basler   s pylon Driver Package  You can download the pylon package from  the Basler website  www baslerweb com beitraege beitrag_en_71708 html     For more information about installing pylon software  see the installation and Setup Guide for  Cameras Used with Basler   s pylon API  AW000611xx000   You can download the guide from the  Basler website  www baslerweb com indizes download_index_en_19627 html     30 Basler pilot    Basler Network Drivers and Parameters    4 Basler Network Drivers and  Parameters    This section describes the Basler network drivers available for your camera and provides detailed  information about the parameters associated with the drivers     Two network drivers are available for the network adapter used with your GigE cameras   The Basler filter driver is a basic GigE Vision network driver that is compatible with all  network adapters  The advantage of this driver is its extensive compatibility     The Basler performance driver is a hardware specifi
90. Offset  Width  and Height for the AOI   The Pixel Format of the image   The Minimum Dynamic Range and the Maximum Dynamic Range    To retrieve data from the extended image data chunk appended to an image that has been received  by your PC  you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser  included in the pylon API  Once the chunk parser has been used  you can retrieve the extended  image data by doing the following    Read the value of the Chunk Offset X parameter    Read the value of the Chunk Offset Y parameter    Read the value of the Chunk Width parameter    Read the value of the Chunk Height parameter    Read the value of the Chunk Pixel Format parameter    Read the value of the Chunk Dynamic Range Min    Read the value of the Chunk Dynamic Range Max     200 Basler pilot    Features    The following code snippet illustrates using the pylon API to run the parser and retrieve the  extended image data        retrieve date from th xtended image data chunk          IChunkParser  amp ChunkParser    Camera CreateChunkParser        GrabResult Result    StreamGrabber RetrieveResult  Result      ChunkParser AttachBuffer   unsigned char   Result Buffer     Result GetPayloadSize        int64_t offsetX   Camera ChunkOffsetX GetValue      int64_t offsetY   Camera ChunkOffsetY GetValue      int64_t width   Camera ChunkWidth GetValue      int64_t height   Camera ChunkHeight GetValue          int64_t dynamicRangeMin   Camera ChunkDynamicRangeMin GetValue  j  
91. P 12S  or the equivalent  The cable must be wired to  conform with the pin assignments shown in the pin assignment tables     The maximum length of the standard power and I O cable is at least 10 meters  The cable must be  shielded and must be constructed with twisted pair wire  Use of twisted pair wire is essential to  ensure that input signals are correctly received     Close proximity to strong magnetic fields should be avoided     Basler pilot 65    Physical Interface    The required 12 pin Hirose plug is available from Basler  Basler also offers a cable assembly that  is terminated with a 12 pin Hirose plug on one end and unterminated on the other  Contact your  Basler sales representative to order connectors or cables     An Incorrect Plug Can Damage the 12 pin Connector    The plug on the cable that you attach to the camera   s 12 pin connector must  have 12 pins  Use of a smaller plug  such as one with 10 pins or 8 pins  can  CAUTION damage the pins in the camera   s 12 pin connector     Hirose  HR10A 10P 12S  12 pin Plug              A  In Pwr Gnd  PCS Pwr Gnd       VO In 1    VO In 2  I O In Gnd   O Out 1    Coot   I O Out 2  in PVC    CETE  C oua            Standard Power    and I O Cable  Fig  24  Standard Power and I O Cable  Note  To avoid a voltage drop with long power wires  we recommend that you supply    camera power VCC through two separate wires between the power supply  and the camera as shown in the figure above     We also recommend that you supply came
92. PI and set the exposure time parameter for your desired exposure time   2  Set the value of the camera   s Acquisition Mode parameter to Single Frame     3  Execute an Acquisition Start command  This prepares the camera to react to a single trigger    In single frame mode  executing the start command prepares the camera to react to a single    trigger    4  Check the state of the camera   s Trigger Ready signal   a  If the TrigRdy signal is high  you can transition the ExTrig signal when desired     b  If the TrigRdy signal is low  wait until TrigRdy goes high and then transition the ExTrig signal  when desired     5  When the ExTrig signal transitions from low to high  image acquisition will start  Exposure will  continue for the length of time you specified in step 1     6  At the end of the specified exposure time  readout and transmission of the acquired image will  take place     7  At this point  the camera would ignore any additional ExTrig signal transitions  To acquire  another image  you must     a  Repeat step 3 to prepare the camera to react to a hardware trigger transition    b  Repeat step 4 to check if the camera is ready to acquire an image    c  Repeat step 5 to begin image acquisition  You can set the exposure time and the Acquisition Mode parameter values from within your  application software by using the pylon API  You can also execute the Acquisition Start command     The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and ex
93. The recommended mating connector is the Hirose micro plug  part number HR10A 10P 12S  or the  equivalent     64 Basler pilot    Physical lnterface    7 4 Cabling Requirements    7 4 1 Ethernet Cables    Use high quality Ethernet cables  To avoid EMI  the cables must be shielded  Use of category 6 or  category 7 cables with S STP shielding is strongly recommended  As a general rule  applications  with longer cables or applications in harsh EMI conditions require higher category cables     Either a straight through  patch  or a cross over Ethernet cable can be used to connect the camera  directly to a GigE network adapter in a PC or to a network switch     Close proximity to strong magnetic fields should be avoided     7 4 2 Standard Power and I O Cable    Note      The standard power and I O cable is intended for use if the camera is not  connected to a PLC device  If the camera is connected to a PLC device  we  recommend using a PLC power and I O cable rather than the standard power  and I O cable   You can use a PLC power and I O cable when the camera is not connected to  a PLC device  if power for the I O input is supplied with 24 VDC     See the following section for more information on PLC power and I O cables     A single cable is used to connect power to the camera and to connect to the camera   s I O lines as  shown in Figure 24     The end of the standard power and I O cable that connects to the camera must be terminated with  a Hirose micro plug  part number HR10A 10
94. TriggerSource SetValue  TriggerSource_Software                Camera ExposureMode SetValue  ExposureMode_Timed       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     80 Basler pilot    Image Acquisition Control    You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     8 2 2 Acquiring a Single Image by Applying  One Software Trigger    You can set the camera to react to a single software trigger and then issue a software trigger to  begin image acquisition  To do so  follow this sequence    Access the camera   s API and set the exposure time parameter for your desired exposure time   2  Set the value of the camera   s Acquisition Mode parameter to Single Frame     3  Execute an Acquisition Start command  This prepares the camera to react to a software  trigger     When you are ready to begin an image acquisition  execute a Trigger Software command     5  Image acquisition will start and exposure will continue for the length of time you specified in  step 1     6  At the end of the specified exposure time  readout and transmission of the acquired image will  take place     7  At this point  the camera would ignore any additional software triggers  To acquire another  image  you must   a  Repeat step 3 to prepare the camera to react to a software trigger   b  Repeat step 4 to issue a software trigger  
95. VEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE     22 Basler pilot    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    1 7 Avoiding EMI and ESD Problems    The cameras are frequently installed in industrial environments  These environments often include  devices that generate electromagnetic interference  EMI  and they are prone to electrostatic  discharge  ESD   Excessive EMI and ESD can cause problems with your camera such as false  triggering or can cause the camera to suddenly stop capturing images  EMI and ESD can also have  a negative impact on the quality of the image data transmitted by the camera     To avoid problems with EMI and ESD  you should follow these general guidelines   Always use high quality shielded cables  The use of high quality cables is one of the best  defenses against EMI and ESD     Try to use camera cables that are the correct length and try to run the camera cables and  power cables parallel to each other  Avoid coiling camera cables  If the cables are too long   use a meandering path rather then coiling the cables     Avoid placing camera cables parallel to wires carrying high current  switching voltages such as  wires supplying stepper motors or electrical devices that employ switching technology  Placing  camera cables near to these types of devices may cause problems with the camera     Attempt to connect all grounds to a single point  e g   use a single power outlet for the entire  system and connect all grounds to the single outlet  This
96. Value  Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax               Select gain for automatic luminance control      Set gain limits for luminance control    Camera GainSelector SetValue  GainSelector_All          Camera AutoGainRawLowerLimit SetValue  Camera GainRaw GetMin            Camera AutoGainRawUpperLimit SetValue  Camera GainRaw GetMax            Set target value for luminance control  This is always expressed             by an 8 bit value  regardless of the current pixel format     i e  0   gt  black  255   gt  white  Camera AutoTargetValue SetValue  128                Set mode of operation for gain auto function    Camera GainAuto SetValue  GainAuto_Once       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For general information about auto functions  see Section 11 12 on page 180     For information about Auto Function AOls and how to set them  see Section 11 12 1 2 on page 182     188    Basler pilot    Features    11 12 3Exposure Auto    Exposure Auto is an auto function and the  automatic  counterpart to manually setting an  absolute   exposure time  The exposure auto function automatically adjusts the Exposure Time Abs parameter  value within set limits  until a target average gray value for the pixel data of the related Auto Function  AOI is reached     In contrast to the manually set  absolute  exposure time  t
97. _en_19627 html     The guide includes the information you will need to install both hardware and software and to begin  capturing images  It also describes the recommended network adapters  describes the  recommended architecture for the network to which your camera is attached  and deals with the IP  configuration of your camera and network adapter     After completing your camera installation  refer to the  Basler Network Drivers and Parameters  and   Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth  sections of this camera User   s   Manual for information about improving your camera   s performance in a network and about using  multiple cameras     Basler pilot 27    Software and Hardware Installation    28 Basler pilot    Tools for Changing Camera Parameters    3 Tools for Changing Camera  Parameters    This section explains the options available for changing the camera   s parameters  The available  options let you change parameters either by using stand alone tools that access the camera via a  GUI or by accessing the camera from within your software application     3 1 The pylon Viewer    The Basler pylon Viewer is a standalone application that lets you view and change most of the  camera   s parameter settings via a GUI based interface  The viewer also lets you acquire images   display them  and save them  Using the pylon Viewer software is a very convenient way to get your  camera up and running quickly when you are doing your initial camera evaluation or do
98. a green lens in the filter  you get 12 bits of green data  And for each  pixel covered with a blue lens in the filter  you get 12 bits of blue data   This type of pixel data is  sometimes referred to as  raw  output      The tables below describe how the data for the even lines and for the odd lines of a received frame  will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer BG12 Packed  output     The following standards are used in the tables    Po   the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a line  Ph   the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a line  Bo   the first byte of data for a line    Bm   the last byte of data for a line                                                                                  Even Lines   Byte Data   Bo Blue value for Pg bits 11    4   B  Green value for P4 bits 3     0 Blue value for Pg bits 3     0  Bo Green value for P4 bits 11     4   B3 Blue value for Po bits 11    4   B4 Green value for Pg bits 3     0 Blue value for P3 bits 3     0  Bs Green value for P3 bits 11     4   Be Blue value for P4 bits 11     4   B7 Green value for Ps bits 3     0 Blue value for P4 bits 3     0  Bg Green value for Ps bits 11     4   Bm 5 Blue value for Ph 3 bits 11     4   Bm 4 Green value for P     bits 3     0 Blue value for P   3 bits 3     0  Bm 3 Green value for P  o bits 11     4   Bm 2 Blue value for Ph 1 bits 11     4   Bm 1 Green value for P  bits 3     0 Blue value for P  4 bits 3    0  Bm Green value for Py  bits 
99. a is set to shift by 1  the output from  the camera will include bit 10 through bit 3 from each ADC  ADC    bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit  The result of shifting once is that the output of the 10 9 8 7 6 5432 1 0  camera is effectively multiplied by 2  For example        assume that the camera is set for no shift  that it is lM  viewing a uniform white target  and that under these  conditions the reading for the brightest pixel is 10  If  you changed the digital shift setting to shift by 1  the  reading would increase to 20     S  i  Shifted Once       If the pixel values being output by the camera   s sensor are high enough to set bit 11 to 1  we  recommend not using shift by 1  If you do nonetheless  all bits output from the camera will  automatically be set to 1  Therefore  you should only use the shift by 1 setting when your pixel  readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 128     158 Basler pilot    Features    Shift by 2    When the camera is set to shift by 2  the output from the    camera will include bit 9 through bit 2 from each ADC  ADC    The result of shifting twice is that the output of the    f 3 a5 bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit  camera is effectively multiplied by 4  fa 10 9 8 7 6 54 3 2 1 0       If the pixel values being output by the camera   s sensor  are high enough to set bit 10 or bit 11 to 1  we  recommend not using shift by 2  If you do nonetheless   all bits output f
100. a will determine whether the exposures are overlapped or not overlapped  If we define the     frame period    as the time from the start of exposure for one image acquisition to the start of  exposure for the next image acquisition  then     Exposure will overlap when  Frame Period  lt  Exposure Time   Readout Time  Exposure will not overlap when  Frame Period  gt  Exposure Time   Readout Time    You can calculate the readout time for a captured image by using the formula on page 99     8 5 1 Guidelines for Overlapped Operation    If you will be operating the camera with overlapped exposure  there are two important guidelines to  keep in mind     You must not begin the exposure time for a new image acquisition while the exposure time of  the previous acquisition is in progress     You must not end the exposure time of the current image acquisition until readout of the  previously acquired image is complete     The camera will ignore any trigger signals that violate these guidelines     When you are operating a camera with overlapped exposure and using a hardware trigger signal  to trigger image acquisition  you could use the camera   s exposure time parameter settings and  timing formulas to calculate when it is safe to begin each new acquisition  However  there is a much  more convenient way to know when it safe to begin each acquisition  The camera supplies a    trigger  ready    signal that is specifically designed to let you trigger overlapped exposure safely and  efficie
101. abResult Result    StreamGrabber RetrieveResult  Result      ChunkParser AttachBuffer   unsigned char   Result Buffer     Result GetPayloadSize        if   ChunkParser HasCRC    amp  amp    ChunkParser CheckCRC        cerr  lt  lt   Image corrupted    lt  lt  endl     For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     212 Basler pilot    Features    11 18 Event Reporting    Event reporting is available on the camera  With event reporting  the camera can generate an   event  and transmit it to the PC whenever a specific situation has occurred     Currently  the camera can generate and transmit an event for two types of situations     An end of an exposure has occurred  An event overrun has occurred    An Example of Event Reporting    As an example of how event reporting works  assume that  end of exposure    event reporting has  been enabled in the camera  Also assume that an end of exposure has just occurred in the camera   In this case     1  An  end of exposure event  is created  The event contains     An Event Type Identifier  In this case  the identifier would show that an end of exposure type  event has occurred     A Stream Channel Identifier  Currently this identifier is always 0   A Frame ID  This number indicates the frame count at the time that the event occurred     A Timestamp  This is a timestamp indicating w
102. able of Contents    vi    Basler pilot    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    1 Specifications  Requirements   and Precautions    This section lists the camera models covered by the manual  It provides the general specifications  for those models and the basic requirements for using them     This section also includes specific precautions that you should keep in mind when using the  cameras  We strongly recommend that you read and follow the precautions     1 1 Models    The current Basler pilot GigE Vision camera models are listed in the top row of the specification  table on the next page of this manual  The camera models are differentiated by their sensor size   their maximum frame rate at full resolution  and whether the camera   s sensor is mono or color     The Basler pilot GigE Vision camera models are available in the following housing variants     standard housing  90   head housing    The names for the housing variants other than the standard housing are appended to the camera   s  name  e g  piA640 210gm gc 90   head     Unless otherwise noted  the material in this manual applies to all of the camera models listed in the  tables  Material that only applies to a particular camera model or to a subset of models  such as to  color cameras or a specific housing variant only  will be so designated     Basler pilot 1    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    1 2 General Specifications       Specification    piA640 210gm gc    piA1000 48gm gc    piA
103. ach charge  Each voltage is then amplified by a Variable Gain Control  VGC  and  digitized by an Analog to Digital converter  ADC   For optimal digitization  gain and black level can  be adjusted by setting camera parameters  After each voltage has been amplified and digitized  it  passes through an FPGA and into an image buffer  As the pixel data passes through the FPGA  it  is reordered so that the pixel data for each line will be transmitted from the camera in ascending  order from pixel 1 through pixel n  All shifting is clocked according to the camera   s internal data rate   Shifting continues in a line by line fashion until all image data has been read out of the sensor     The pixel data leaves the image buffer and passes back through the FPGA to an Ethernet controller  where it is assembled into data packets  The packets are then transmitted via an Ethernet network  to a network adapter in the host PC  The Ethernet controller also handles transmission and receipt  of control data such as changes to the camera   s parameters     Basler pilot 57    Camera Functional Description    The image buffer between the sensor and the Ethernet controller allows data to be read out of the  sensor at a rate that is independent of the data transmission rate between the camera and the host  computer  This ensures that the data transmission rate has no influence on image quality                                                                                                            
104. al      ExTrig      Signal                Exposure Start Delay  gt     lt  Exposure Start Delay    p  a      Exposure Exposure Exposure   E Frame N Frame N 1 Frame N 2  xposure  Em a a  gt   Frame Frame N Readout to the Image Buffer Frame N 1 Readout to the Image Buffer  Readout     e     Transmission Start Delay     gt      Transmission Start Delay         a   Frame Frame N Transmission to Host PC Frame N 1 Transmission to Host PC    Transmission  Timing charts are not drawn to scale    Fig  38  Exposure Start Controlled with an ExTrig Signal    You can calculate the frame readout time by using this formula   Frame Readout Time     AOI Height x C4 us     Co us    Where the values for the constants C4 and C   are from the table in Section 8 9 on page 102 and  AOI height is the height of the acquired frames as determined by the AOI settings     For more information about the AOI height  see Section 11 6 on page 163     For more information about the averaging feature  see Section 11 9 on page 173     You can calculate an approximate frame transmission time by using this formula     a f ize Parameter Val    Frame Transmission Time   Payload Size Parameter Value    Device Current Throughput Parameter Value    100 Basler pilot    Image Acquisition Control    Note that this is an approximate frame transmission time  Due to the nature of the Ethernet network   the transmission time could vary  Also note that the frame transmission cannot be less than the  frame readout time  So if 
105. amera PixelFormat SetValue  PixelFormat_Monol2Packed     Camera PixelFormat SetValue  PixelFormat_Monol  6       Camera PixelFormat SetValue  PixelFormat_YUV422_YUYV_Packed       Camera PixelFormat SetValue  PixelFormat_BayerGB8                             Camera PixelFormat SetValue  PixelFormat_YUV422Packed                  Camera PixelFormat SetValue  PixelFormat_BayerGB16       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference   You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     108 Basler pilot    9 2    9 2 1    Pixel Data Formats    Pixel Data Formats for Mono Cameras    Mono 8 Format  Equivalent to DCAM Mono 8     When a monochrome camera is set for the Mono 8 pixel data format  it outputs 8 bits of brightness    data per pix    el     The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer    in your PC when the camera is set for Mono 8 output     The following standards are used in the table     Po   the first pixel transmitted by the camera    Ph   the last pixel transmitted by the camera  Bg   the first byte in the buffer    Bm   the last byte in the buffer                                           Byte Data Byte Data   Bo Brightness value for Po         B4 Brightness value for P4 e e   Bo Brightness value for Po Bm 4 Brightness value for Ph 4
106. ameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     Comparing Counter Chunk Data    When comparing trigger input counter data and frame counter data related to the same image  be  aware that the trigger input counter initially starts at 1 whereas the frame counter starts at 0   Therefore  the trigger input count will always be ahead of the matching frame count by one if both  counters were started at the same time and if an image was acquired for every trigger     Whenever the counters restart after having reached 4294967295 they will both start another  counting cycle at 0  Accordingly  the difference between matching counts will always be one   regardless of the number of counting cycles     Note that if both counters were started at the same time and not reset since and if the trigger input  counter is ahead of the matching frame counter by more than one  the camera was overtriggered  and not all external triggers resulted in image acquisitions     Frame Counter Reset    Whenever the camera is powered off  the frame counter will reset to 0  During operation  you can  reset the frame counter via I O input 1  I O input 2 or software  and you can disable the reset  By  default  the frame counter reset is disabled     To use the frame counter reset     Configure the frame counter reset by setting the counter selector to Counter2 and setting the  counter event source to FrameStart     Set the counter reset source to Line1  Line2  Software or 
107. ameters transmitted to  the camera via the Basler pylon API and the GigE interface  There are also parameters available  to set the camera for single frame acquisition or continuous frame acquisition     Exposure start can also be controlled via an externally generated hardware trigger  ExTrig  signal   The ExTrig signal facilitates periodic or non periodic acquisition start  Modes are available that  allow the length of exposure time to be directly controlled by the ExTrig signal or to be set for a pre   programmed period of time     Accumulated charges are read out of the sensor when exposure ends  At readout  the accumulated  charges are transported from the sensor   s light sensitive elements  pixels  to its vertical shift  registers  see Figure 20 on page 58   The charges from the bottom line of pixels in the array are  then moved to two horizontal shift registers as shown in the figure  Charges from the left half of the  line are moved to the left horizontal shift register and charges from the right half of the line are  moved to the right horizontal shift register  The left horizontal shift register shifts out charges from  left to right  that is  pixel 1  pixel 2  pixel 3  and so on  The right horizontal shift register shifts out  charges from right to left  that is  pixel n  pixel n 1  pixel n 2  and so on  where n is the last pixel in  a line      As the charges move out of the horizontal shift registers  they are converted to voltages proportional  to the size of e
108. and 2 are tied together inside of the camera     62       Pins 8 and 9 are tied together inside of the camera     To avoid a voltage drop when there are long wires between your power suppy  and the camera  we recommend that you provide camera power VCC through  separate wires between your power supply and pins 8 and 9 on the camera   We also recommend that you provide camera power ground through separate  wires between your power supply and pins 1 and 2 on the camera     Basler pilot    Physical Interface    7 2 2 RdJ 45 Jack Pin Assignments    The 8 pin RJ 45 jack provides Ethernet access to the camera  Pin assignments adhere to the  Ethernet standard     7 2 3 Pin Numbering                                                                                        Fig  23  Pin Numbering for the 12 pin Receptacle    Basler pilot 63    Physical Interface    7 3 Connector Types    7 3 1 8 pin RJ 45 Jack    The 8 pin jack for the camera   s Ethernet connection is a standard RJ 45 connector     The recommended mating connector is any standard 8 pin RJ 45 plug     Green and Yellow LEDs    This RJ 45 jack on the camera includes a green LED and a yellow LED  When the green LED is lit   it indicates that an active network connection is available  When the yellow LED is lit  it indicates  that data is being transmitted via the network connection     7 3 2 12 pin Connector    The 12 pin connector on the camera is a Hirose micro receptacle  part number HR10A 10R 12P   or the equivalent     
109. ange the size  and the position of the AOI by changing the value of the camera   s X Offset  Y Offset  Width  and  Height parameters    The value of the X Offset parameter determines the starting column for the area of interest    The value of the Y Offset parameter determines the starting line for the area of interest    The value of the Width parameter determines the width of the area of interest    The value of the Height parameter determines the height of the area of interest     When you are setting the camera   s area of interest  you must follow these guidelines on all camera   models   The sum of the X Offset setting plus the Width setting must not exceed the width of the  camera   s sensor  For example  on the piA640 210gm  the sum of the X Offset setting plus the  Width setting must not exceed 648   The sum of the Y Offset setting plus the Height setting must not exceed the height of the  camera   s sensor  For example  on the piA640 210gm  the sum of the Y Offset setting plus the  Height setting must not exceed 488    On monochrome cameras   The X Offset  Y Offset  Width  and Height parameters can be set in increments of 1    On color cameras   The X Offset  Y Offset  Width  and Height parameters can be set in increments of 2 and they  must be set to an even number  For example  the X Offset parameter can be set to 0  2  4  6  8   etc     Note   Normally  the X Offset  Y Offset  Width  and Height parameter settings refer to  the physical columns and lines in the se
110. artup set appear below     220 Basler pilot    Features    User Configuration Sets    As mentioned above  the active configuration set is stored in the camera   s volatile memory and the  settings are lost if the camera is reset or if power is switched off  The camera can save most of the  settings from the current active set to a reserved area in the camera   s non volatile memory  A  configuration set saved in the non volatile memory is not lost when the camera is reset or switched  off  There are three reserved areas in the camera   s non volatile memory available for saving  configuration sets  A configuration set saved in a reserved area is commonly referred to as a  user  configuration set  or  user set  for short     The three available user sets are called User Set 1  User Set 2  and User Set 3     Note   The settings for the luminance lookup table are not saved in the user sets and  are lost when the camera is reset or switched off  If used  these settings must  be set again after each camera reset or restart     Startup Set    You can select the default configuration set or one of the user configuration sets stored in the  camera   s non volatile memory to be the  startup set   The configuration set that you have selected  as the startup set will automatically be loaded into the active set whenever the camera starts up at  power on or after a reset  Instructions for selecting the startup set appear below     11 21 1Saving User Sets    Saving the current active set i
111. as only 12 bits effective  the leader    of transmitted frames will indicate Mono 12 as the pixel format     Basler pilot 111    Pixel Data Formats    9 2 3 Mono 12 Packed Format    When a monochrome camera is set for the Mono 12 Packed pixel data format  it outputs 12 bits of  brightness data per pixel  Every three bytes transmitted by the camera contain data for two pixels     The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer    in your PC when the camera is set for Mono 12 Packed output     The following standards are used in the table     Po   the first pixel transmitted by the camera    Ph   the last pixel transmitted by the camera  Bg   the first byte in the buffer    Bm   the last byte in the buffer                                                                                                 Byte Data  Bo Po bits 11    4  B4 P4 bits 3    0 Po bits 3      Bo P  bits 11    4  B3 Py bits 11     4  By P3 bits 3    0 Po   bits 3      Bs P3 bits 11    4  Bg P  bits 11    4  B7 Ps bits 3     0 Py bits 3      Bg Ps bits 11    4  Bg Pe bits 11     4  Bio P7 bits 3    0 P6 bits 3      B41 P7 bits 11     4  Bm 5 P  3 bits 11     4  Bm 4 P   9 bits 3    0 P  3 bits 3      Bm 3 Ph 2 bits 11     4  Bm 2 Ph 1 bits 11     4  Bm 1 Ph bits 3    0 P  1 bits 3      Bm P  bits 11    4   112    Basler pilot    Pixel Data Formats    When a monochrome camera is set for Mono 12 Packed  the pixel data output is 12 bit data of the     unsigne
112. as user settable  you can use camera  parameters to set the state of the line     Setting the State of a Single User Settable Output Line  To set the state of a single user settable output line     Use the User Output Selector to select the output line you want to set  For example  if you  have designated output line 3 as user settable  you would select user settable output 3     Set the value of the User Output Value parameter to true  high  or false  low   This will set the  state of the selected line     You can set the Output Selector and the User Output Value parameter from within your application  software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to designate  output line 3 as user settable and setting the state of the output line     Camera  LineSelector SetValue  LineSelector_Out3                Camera  LineSource SetValue  LineSource_UserOutput       Camera UserOutputSelector SetValue  UserOutputSelector_UserOutput3                Camera UserOutputValue SetValue  true     bool currentUserOutput3State   Camera UserOutputValue GetValue           For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     Setting the State of Multiple User Settable Output Lines    The User Output Value All parameter is a 32 bit value  As shown in Figure 40  the lowest four bits  of the parameter value will
113. asler pilot 149    Features                                                 Gain Raw All Gain Raw Tap 1 Gain Raw Tap 2  Camera Model Min Max Max Max Max Max Max  Seiting Seiting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting   8 bit  16 bit  8 bit  16 bit  8 bit  16 bit  depth  depth  depth  depth  depth  depth   piA640 210 0 500 400 500 400 500 400  piA1000 48 0 500 400 500 400 500 400  piA1600 35 0 500 400 500 400 500 400  piA1900 32 0 500 400 500 400 500 400  piA2400 12 0 500 400 500 400 500 400  piA2400 17 0 500 400 500 400 500 400             Table 15  Minimum and Maximum Allowed Gain Raw Settings       Gain Raw All   Gain Raw Tap 1    Gain Raw All   Gain Raw Tap 2                            Camera Model Min Max Max Max Max  Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting   8 bit depth   16 bit depth   8 bit depth   16 bit depth   piA640 210 0 500 400 500 400  piA1000 48 0 500 400 500 400  piA1600 35 0 500 400 500 400  piA1900 32 0 500 400 500 400  piA2400 12 0 500 400 500 400  piA2400 17 0 500 400 500 400                         Table 16  Minimum and Maximum Allowed Total Gain Settings    If  for example  the piA640 210 gm gc camera is set for a pixel data format that yields 8 bit effective  pixel depth  Mono 8  YUV 4 2 2 Packed  YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  Packed      The Gain Raw All value can be set in a range from 0 to 500     The Gain Raw Tap 1 value can be set in a range from 0 to 500     The Gain Raw Tap 2 value can be set in a range from 0 to 500     The sum of the Gain Raw All setting p
114. ata Stamp    Before you can use any of the camera   s  chunk  features  the  chunk mode  must be made active   Making the chunk mode active does two things     It makes the Frame Counter  the Trigger Input Counter  the Time Stamp  the Line Status All   and the CRC Checksum chunk features available to be enabled     It automatically enables the Extended Image Data chunk feature   To make the chunk mode active   Set the Chunk Mode Active parameter to true     You can set the Chunk Mode Active parameter value from within your application software by using  the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value     Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue  true       Note that making the chunk mode inactive switches all chunk features off     Also note that when you enable ChunkModeActive  the PayloadType for the camera changes from   Pylon  PayloadType_Image  to  Pylon  PayloadType_ChunkData      For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     Once the chunk mode is active and the Extended Image Data feature has been enabled  the  camera will automatically add an  extended image data  chunk to each acquired image  The  extended image data chunk appended to each acquired image contains some basic information  about the image  The information contained in the chunk includes    The X Offset  Y 
115. aw SetValue  100         Set Gain Raw Tap 1    Camera GainSelector SetValue  GainSelector_Tapl          Camera GainRaw SetValue  0         Set Gain Raw Tap 2       Camera GainSelector SetValue  GainSelector_Tap2          Camera GainRaw SetValue  0       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     152 Basler pilot    Features    11 2 Black Level    Adjusting the camera   s black level will result in an offset to the pixel values output from the camera     As mentioned in the  Functional Description  section of this manual  for readout purposes  the  sensor used in the camera is divided into two halves  As a result of this design  there are three black  level adjustments available  Black Level Raw All  Black Level Raw Tap 1  and Black Level Raw  Tap 2     Black Level Raw All is a global adjustment  i e   its setting affects both halves of the sensor  The  Black Level Raw All value can be set in a range from 0 to 1023     Black Level Raw Tap 1 sets an additional amount of black level adjustment for the right half of the  sensor  The Black Level Raw Tap 1 value can be set in a range from 0 to 1023  The total black level  for the right half of the sensor will be the sum of the Black Level Raw All value plus the Black Level  Raw Tap 1 value     B
116. bits   the lookup table is used to perform a 12 bit to 12 bit conversion  But the lookup table can also be  used in 12 bit to 8 bit fashion  To use the table in 12 bit to 8 bit fashion  you enter 12 bit values into  the table and enable the table as you normally would  But instead of setting the camera for a pixel  format that results in 12 bit camera output  you set the camera for a pixel format that results in 8 bit  output  such as Mono 8 or YUV 4 2 2 Packed   In this situation  the camera will first use the values  in the table to do a 12 bit to 12 bit conversion  It will then truncate the lowest 4 bits of the converted  value and will report out the remaining 8 highest bits     Changing the Values in the Luminance Lookup Table and Enabling the Table    You can change the values in the luminance lookup table  LUT  and enable the use of the lookup  table by doing the following     Use the LUT Selector to select a lookup table   Currently there is only one lookup table  available  i e   the  luminance  lookup table described above      Use the LUT Index parameter to select a value in the lookup table  The LUT Index parameter  selects the value in the table to change  The index number for the first value in the table is 0   for the second value in the table is 1  for the third value in the table is 2  and so on     Use the LUT Value parameter to set the selected value in the lookup table   Use the LUT Index parameter and LUT value parameters to set other table values as desi
117. by packet  n 1   In this case  as soon as packet  n 1  enters the receive window  packet  n will be detected as missing     Basler pilot 33    Basler Network Drivers and Parameters    General Parameters    Enable Resend   Enables the packet resend mechanisms     If the Enable Resend parameter is set to false  the resend mechanisms are disabled  The  performance driver will not check for missing packets and will not send resend requests to the  camera     If the Enable Resend parameter is set to true  the resend mechanisms are enabled  The  performance driver will check for missing packets  Depending on the parameter settings and the  resend response  the driver will send one or several resend requests to the camera     Receive Window Size   Sets the size of the receive window     Threshold Resend Mechanism Parameters    The threshold resend request mechanism is illustrated in Figure 16 where the following  assumptions are made     Packets 997  998  and 999 are missing from the stream of packets   Packet 1002 is missing from the stream of packets     DIAGRAM IS NOT DRAWN TO SCALE     3   4   5   6   1   2     i        985  986  987  988  989  990  991  992  993  994  995  99611000  1001  1003  10041005    1006 al                                                                                                     gt     Time       Fig  16  Example of a Receive Window with Resend Request Threshold  amp  Resend Request Batching Threshold     1  Front end of the receive window  Mis
118. c GigE Vision network driver  The driver  is only compatible with network adapters that use specific Intel chipsets  The advantage of the  performance driver is that it significantly lowers the CPU load needed to service the network   traffic between the PC and the camera s   It also has a more robust packet resend mechanism     Note  During the installation process you should have installed either the filter driver  or the performance driver     For more information about compatible Intel chipsets  see the Installation and Setup Guide for  Cameras Used with Basler   s pylon API   AW000611xx000      For more information about installing the network drivers  see the Installation and Setup Guide for  Cameras Used with Basler   s pylon API   AW000611xx000      Basler pilot 31    Basler Network Drivers and Parameters    4 1 The Basler Filter Driver    The Basler filter driver is a basic driver GigE Vision network driver  It is designed to be compatible  with most network adapter cards     The functionality of the filter driver is relatively simple  For each frame  the driver checks the order  of the incoming packets  If the driver detects that a packet or a group of packets is missing  it will  wait for a specified period of time to see if the missing packet or group of packets arrives  If the  packet or group does not arrive within the specified period  the driver will send a resend request for  the missing packet or group of packets     The parameters associated with the filter
119. ccordingly  for each averaged image the num   ber of required triggers will be equal to the set number of individual images used for averaging     When the camera   s acquisition mode is set to single frame  a single averaged image will be ob   tained  The averaged image will be based on the set number of individual images  The number of  triggers necessary for each averaged image will be equal to the set number of individual images   For example  if the acquisition mode is set to single frame and the number of individual images used  for averaging is set to three  three triggers are needed to obtain the averaged image     Note     Make sure that for each averaged image  the number of triggers is equal to the  set number of individual images used for averaging     Note    Make sure the object being imaged does not move while the sequence of  individual images is acquired  Otherwise  the object will appear blurred in the  averaged image     Note    Although the camera allows changing the settings for all features while a  sequence of individual images is acquired  we do not recommend to do so  The  new settings would be applied as soon as they are set  Accordingly  the  averaged image would be based on individual images acquired with different  feature settings and poor quality for the averaged image may result     We recommend to only change the feature settings while individual images  used for averaging are not acquired     Basler pilot 173    Features    When  end of expos
120. ction of view of standard pilot cameras     The cameras are manufactured with high precision  Planar  parallel  and angular sides guarantee  precise mounting with high repeatability     The dimensions in millimeters for cameras with 90   head housing are as shown in Figure 13     Camera housings are equipped with four mounting holes on the top and four mounting holes on the  bottom as shown in the drawings  In addition  there are four mounting holes in the front module  4x  M3  4 5 mm deep      Note   For optimum accuracy in the positioning of the camera s optical axis  we  recommend using the front module reference plane  see the figure in the  Sensor Positioning Accuracy section  as mounting surface     Basler pilot 17    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    2 x M2  4 5 deep                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               2 x M3  4 8 deep 32 1  2 x M3  4 5 deep 15 6  32 1    3 1  le        q 2    oO  TT 1       amp   Yo  gt   ca  15 4  a  _ 110 es 20 6 1    104 65 ee 2 x M3  4 5 deep    BASLER   T A  g   3  i NA  2     ie  I  D     85 65   Photosensitive     28 5 surface of the    29    sensor  3 25    
121. d    type  The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels  are as shown in the table below        This Data Value   Hexadecimal     Indicates This Signal Level   Decimal                                OxOFFF 4095  OxOFFE 4094  0x0001 1  0x0000 0          Basler pilot    113    Pixel Data Formats    9 2 4 YUV 4 2 2 Packed Format   Equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2     When a monochrome camera is set for the YUV 4 2 2 Packed pixel data format  the camera  transmits Y  U  and V values in a fashion that mimics the output from a color camera set for YUV  4 2 2 Packed     The Y value transmitted for each pixel is an actual 8 bit brightness value similar to the pixel data  transmitted when a monochrome camera is set for Mono 8  The U and V values transmitted will  always be zero  With this format  a Y value is transmitted for each pixel  but the U and V values are  only transmitted for every second pixel     The order of the pixel data for a received frame in the image buffer in your PC is similar to the order  of YUV 4 2 2 Packed output from a color camera     For more information about the YUV 4 2 2 Packed format on color cameras  see Section 9 3 8 on  page 129     9 2 5 YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  Packed Format    When a monochrome camera is set for the YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  Packed pixel data format  the camera  transmits Y  U  and V values in a fashion that mimics the output from a color camera set for YUV  4 2 2  YUYV  Packed     The Y value transmitted for each pi
122. d you must make sure that this total does not exceed the bandwidth of the single path  125  MByte s      An easy way to make a quick check of the total data output from the cameras that will operate  simultaneously is to read the value of the Bandwidth Assigned parameter for each camera  This  parameter indicates the camera   s gross data output rate in bytes per second with its current  settings  If the sum of the bandwidth assigned values is less than 125 MByte s  the cameras should  be able to operate simultaneously without problems  If it is greater  you must lower the data output  rate of one or more of the cameras     You can lower the data output rate on a camera by using the Inter packet Delay parameter  This  parameter adds a delay between the transmission of each packet from the camera and thus slows    50 Basler pilot    Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth    the data transmission rate of the camera  The higher the inter packet delay parameter is set  the  greater the delay between the transmission of each packet will be and the lower the data  transmission rate will be  After you have adjusted the Inter packet Delay parameter on each  camera  you can check the sum of the Bandwidth Assigned parameter values and see if the sum is  now less than 125 MByte s     5 2 1 A Procedure for Managing Bandwidth    In theory  managing bandwidth sharing among several cameras is as easy as adjusting the inter   packet delay  In practice  it is a bit more comp
123. deActive SetValue  true     Camera ChunkSelector SetValue  ChunkSelector_Timestamp             Camera ChunkEnable SetValue  true             retrieve data from the chunk       IChunkParser  amp ChunkParser    Camera CreateChunkParser        GrabResult Result    StreamGrabber RetrieveResult  Result      ChunkParser AttachBuffer   unsigned char   Result Buffer     Result GetPayloadSize        int64_t timeStamp   Camera ChunkTimestamp GetValue         For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     Basler pilot 205    Features    You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     11 17 5 Trigger Input Counter    The Trigger Input Counter feature numbers external image acquisition triggers sequentially as they  are received  When the feature is enabled  a chunk is added to each image containing the related  value of the trigger input counter     The trigger input counter is a 32 bit value  On the first counting cycle  the counter starts at 1 and  increments by 1 for each received trigger  The counter counts up to 4294967295 unless it is reset  before  see below   After having reached the maximum value the counter will continue counting   starting at 0     Be aware that if the camera is oparating in continuous frame mode  free run  the trigger input  counter will not be available     Note      The c
124. dicated signal  levels are as shown in the table below  Note that for 16 bit data  you might expect a value range  from 0x0000 to OxFFFF  However  with the camera set for Bayer BG 16 only 12 bits of the 16 bits  transmitted are effective  Therefore  the highest data value you will see is OxOFFF indicating a                                        signal level of 4095   This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level   Hexadecimal   Decimal   OxOFFF 4095  OxOFFE 4094  0x0001 1  0x0000 0  Note  When a camera that is set for Bayer BG 16 has only 12 bits effective  the  leader of transmitted frames will indicate Bayer BG 12 as the pixel format   124 Basler pilot    Pixel Data Formats    9 3 6 Bayer GB 12 Packed Format    When a color camera is set for the Bayer GB 12 Packed pixel dataformat  it outputs 12 bits of data  per pixel  Every three bytes transmitted by the camera contain data for two pixels     With the Bayer GB 12 Packed coding  the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way   So  for each pixel covered with a red lens in the sensor   s Bayer filter  you get 12 bits of red data   For each pixel covered with a green lens in the filter  you get 12 bits of green data  And for each  pixel covered with a blue lens in the filter  you get 12 bits of blue data   This type of pixel data is  sometimes referred to as  raw  output      For more information about the Bayer filter  see Section 9 3 1 on page 115     The tables below describe how the data for the even lines and
125. drop down menu   A LAN Connection Properties window will open  Click the Configure button    An Adapter Properties window will open  Click the Advanced tab     FON      Note      We strongly recommend using the default parameter settings  Changing  the parameters can have a significant negative effect on the performance of  the adapter and the driver     40 Basler pilot    Basler Network Drivers and Parameters    4 3 Transport Layer Parameters    The transport layer parameters are part of the camera   s basic GigE implementation  These  parameters do not normally require adjustment     Read Timeout   If a register read request is sent to the camera via the transport layer  this  parameter designates the time out  in milliseconds  within which a response must be received     Write Timeout   If a register write request is sent to the camera via the transport layer  this  parameter designates the time out  in milliseconds  within which an acknowledge must be received     Heartbeat Timeout   The GigE Vision standard requires implementation of a heartbeat routine to  monitor the connection between the camera and the host PC  This parameter sets the heartbeat  timeout  in milliseconds   If a timeout occurs  the camera releases the network connection and  enters a state that allows reconnection     Note      Management of the heartbeat time is normally handled by the Basler   s basic  GigE implementation and changing this parameter is not required for normal  camera operation  Howev
126. dth exposure mode  set minimum exposure time to 3000 us          Camera  ExposureMode SetValu ExposureMode_TriggerWidth             Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue  3000          For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters   For more information about the pylon viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29   For more information about the camera   s exposure time parameter  see Section 8 4 on page 91     For more information about overlapped exposure  see Section 8 5 on page 94     86 Basler pilot    Image Acquisition Control    For more detailed information about using the trigger width exposure mode with overlapped  exposure  refer to the application notes called  Using a Specific External Trigger Signal with  Overlapped Exposure   AW000565xx000   The application notes are available in the downloads  section of the Basler website  www baslerweb com     8 3 2 Setting the Camera for Hardware Triggering    To set the camera for hardware triggering     Use the Trigger Selector parameter to select the Acquisition Start trigger   Use the Trigger Mode parameter to set the trigger mode to On   Use the Trigger Source parameter to set the camera to accept the hardware trigger signal on  input line 1 or on input line 2   Use the Trigger Activation parameter to set the camera for rising edge triggering or for falling  edge triggering   You
127. e   It is not possible to monitor the status of the Acquisition Start command   Therefore  you can not use the status of the Acquisition Start command to  determine when the camera is ready to be triggered for an image acquisition     To determine the acquisition status of the camera     Use the Acquisition Status Selector to select the Frame Trigger Wait status     Read the value of the AcquisitionStatus parameter  If the value is set to  false   the camera is  not ready to receive a software trigger  if the value is set to  true   the camera is ready to  receive a software trigger     You can set the Acquisition Status Selector and read the AcquisitionStatus parameter from within  your application software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the  API to set and read the parameter values        Set the Acquisition Status Selector       Camera AcquisitionStatusSelector SetValue    AcquisitionStatusSelector_FrameTriggerWait          Read the acquisition status       bool IsWaitingForFrameTrigger   Camera AcquisitionStatus GetValue       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the Acquisition Status Selector     198 Basler pilot    Features    11 17 Chunk Features    This section provides detailed information about the chunk features available on each camera     11 17 1What Are Chunk Features     In
128. e  R  glement sur le brouillage radio  lectrique     Life Support Applications    These products are not designed for use in life support appliances  devices  or systems where  malfunction of these products can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury  Basler  customers using or selling these products for use in such applications do so at their own risk and  agree to fully indemnify Basler for any damages resulting from such improper use or sale     Warranty Note    Do not open the housing of the camera  The warranty becomes void if the housing is opened     All material in this publication is subject to change without notice and is copyright Basler  Vision Technologies     Contacting Basler Support Worldwide    Europe     Basler AG   An der Strusbek 60   62  22926 Ahrensburg  Germany    Tel    49 4 102 463 500  Fax    49 4102 463 599    bc support europe baslerweb com    Americas     Basler  Inc    855 Springdale Drive  Suite 160  Exton  PA 19341   U S A     Tel    1 877 934 8472  Fax    1 610 280 7608    bc support usa baslerweb com    Asia     Basler Asia Pte  Ltd   8 Boon Lay Way     03   03 Tradehub 21  Singapore 609964    Tel    65 6425 0472  Fax    65 6425 0473    bc support asia baslerweb com    www baslerweb com    Table of Contents    Table of Contents    1    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions                 2000055 1  del    ModelS lt  26  ec tec acca eehtbadives sheet ied saae ae edd tie a o hie agddadon 1  1 2 General Specifications       
129. e Basler pylon IP Configuration tool to read or write the Device User ID     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     For more information about the pylon IP Configuration Tool  see the Installation and Setup Guide  for Cameras Used with Basler   s pylon API   AW000611xx000      Basler pilot    219    Features    11 21 Configuration Sets       A configuration set is a group of values that contains all Non volatile  of the parameter settings needed to control the camera  Memory  There are three basic types of configuration sets  the EAN Volatile             Memory  active configuration set  the default configuration set   RAM   and user configuration sets  User Set 1   User Set 2 Active Set  Active Configuration Set       The active configuration set contains the camera   s Standard    current parameter settings and thus determines the       gt    Factory Setup    camera   s performance  that is  what your image q High Gain  currently looks like  When you change parameter se Factory SEHR  settings using the pylon API or the pylon Viewer  you are fay ee  making changes to the active configuration set  The iai Rodi  active configuration set is located in the camera   s   volatile memory and the settings are lost if the camera   is reset or if power is switched off  The active  configuration set is usually called the  active set  for short           Fig  58  Configuration Sets    Default Configuration Set    When a camera is manufactured  numero
130. e camera will decrease  So for any camera where you find that the data  bandwidth assigned is much greater then the data bandwidth needed  you should do this    Raise the setting for the Inter packet delay parameter for the camera    Recalculate the data bandwidth assigned to the camera    Compare the new data bandwidth assigned to the data bandwidth needed     Repeat 1  2  and 3 until the data bandwidth assigned is equal to or just greater than the data  bandwidth needed     Fon  gt     Note      If you increase the inter packet delay to lower a camera   s data output rate  there is something that you must keep in mind  When you lower the data  output rate  you increase the amount of time that the camera needs to transmit  an acquired frame  image   Increasing the frame transmission time can restrict  the camera   s maximum allowed acquisition frame rate     Step 7   Check that the total bandwidth assigned is less than the network capacity     1  For each camera  determine the current value of the Bandwidth Assigned parameter  The  value is in Byte s   Make sure that you determine the value of the Bandwidth Assigned param   eter after you have made any adjustments described in the earlier steps      2  Find the sum of the current Bandwidth Assigned parameter values for all of the cameras     If the sum of the Bandwidth Assigned values is less than 125 MByte s for a Give network or 12 5  M Byte s for a 100 Bit s network  the bandwidth management is OK     If the sum of the Ba
131. e data that it generates  The amount of data bandwidth a camera needs is the  product of several factors  the amount of data included in each image  the amount of chunk data  being added to each image  the  packet overhead  such as packet leaders and trailers  and the  number of frames the camera is acquiring each second     For each camera  you can use the two formulas below to calculate the data bandwidth needed  To  use the formulas  you will need to know the current value of the Payload Size parameter and the  Packet Size parameter for each camera  You will also need to know the frame rate  in frames s  at  which each camera will operate     a71  Bytes Frame       Tore   x Packet Overhead       Payload Size 1      Leader Size   Trailer Size  acket Size    Data Bandwidth Needed   Bytes Frame x Frames s    Where   Packet Overhead   72  for a GigE network   78  for a 100 MBit s network   Leader Size   Packet Overhead   36  if chunk mode is not active   Packet Overhead   12  if chunk mode is active     Trailer Size   Packet Overhead   8       x    means round up x to the nearest integer             x  4 means round up x to the nearest multiple of 4    Step 5   Calculate    data bandwidth assigned    to each camera     For each camera  there is a parameter called Bandwidth Assigned  This read only parameter  indicates the total bandwidth that has been assigned to the camera  The Bandwidth Assigned  parameter includes both the bandwidth that can be used for image data transmiss
132. e event of a major interruption in the stream of packets  the parameter will also  ensure that resend requests are sent for missing packets that were detected to be missing  immediately before the interruption     Basler pilot 37    Basler Network Drivers and Parameters    Threshold and Timeout Resend Mechanisms Combined    Figure 18 illustrates the combined action of the threshold and the timeout resend mechanisms  where the following assumptions are made    All parameters set to default    The frame includes 3000 packets    Packet 1002 is missing within the stream of packets and has not been recovered    Packets 2999 and 3000 are missing at the end of the stream of packets  end of the frame      The default values for the performance driver parameters will cause the threshold resend  mechanism to become operative before the timeout resend mechanism  This ensures maximum  efficiency and that resend requests will be sent for all missing packets     With the default parameter values  the resend request threshold is located very close to the front  end of the receive window  Accordingly  there will be only a minimum delay between detecting a  missing packet and sending a resend request for it  In this case  a delay according to the Resend  Timeout parameter will not occur  see Figure 18   In addition  resend request batching will not  occur     DIAGRAM IS NOT DRAWN TO SCALE   1   2   3   5   7   9   10   11     it tt Li    H i    e   lt I 995   996  997  998  999   1000 RIE 100
133. e following code snippet illustrates using the API to read the parameter value     int64_t lineState   Camera LineStatusAll GetValue        The Line Status All parameter is a 32 bit value  As shown in Figure 42  certain bits in the value are  associated with each line and the bits will indicate the state of the lines  If a bit is 0  it indicates that    Basler pilot 147     O Control    the state of the associated line is currently low  If a bit is 1  it indicates that the state of the associated  line is current high     Indicates output line 4 state  Indicates output line 3 state  Indicates output line 2 state Indicates input line 2 state  Indicates output line 1 state Indicates input line 1 state    31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20  19  18  17  16  15 14 13  12  14 10  9  e  7 le  5  4  3  2  11        Fig  42  Line Status All Parameter Bits    148 Basler pilot    Features    11 Features    This section provides detailed information about the standard features available on each camera   It also includes an explanation of their operation and the parameters associated with each feature     11 1 Gain    The camera   s gain is adjustable  As shown in    Figure 43  increasing the gain increases the Gray Values  slope of the response curve for the camera  4095 255  29B 6dB id  This results in a higher gray value output from  12 bit       8 bit          the camera for a given amount of output from  the imaging sensor  Decreasing the gain  decreases the slope of the response cu
134. e sensor    The rows are numbered 0 through n from the top to the bottom of the sensor    The sequence assumes that the camera is set for full resolution     Basler pilot    135    Pixel Data Formats    136 Basler pilot    I O Control    10 I O Control    This section describes how to configure the camera   s two physical input lines and four physical  output lines  It also provides information about monitoring the state of the input and output lines     For more detailed information about the physical and electrical characteristics of the input and  output lines  see Section 7 7 on page 70     10 1 Configuring Input Lines    10 1 1 Assigning an Input Line to Receive a  Hardware Trigger Signal    You can assign one of the camera   s input lines to receive a external hardware trigger  ExTrig   signal  The incoming ExTrig signal can then be used to control image acquisition     Section 8 3 2 on page 87 explains how to configure the camera to react to a hardware trigger signal  and how to assign an input line to receive the hardware trigger signal     Note  By default  physical input line 1 is assigned to receive the ExTrig signal  You  can assign only one line to receive the ExTrig input signal     Basler pilot 137     O Control    10 1 2 Using an Unassigned Input Line to Receive  a User Input Signal    You can use an unassigned input line to receive your own  user generated input signal  The  electrical characteristics of your input signal must meet the requirements shown in t
135. e stamp is based on a counter that counts the number of   time stamp clock ticks  generated by the camera  The unit for each tick is 8 ns  as specified by the  Gev Timestamp Tick Frequency   The counter starts at camera reset or at power off on     Note      The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the time stamp feature  or any of the other chunk feature  Making the chunk mode inactive disables all  chunk features     To enable the time stamp chunk     Use the Chunk Selector to select the Time Stamp chunk    Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true   Once the time stamp chunk is enabled  the camera will add a time stamp chunk to each acquired  image     To retrieve data from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC  you must  first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser that is included in the pylon  API  Once the chunk parser has been used  you can retrieve the time stamp information by doing  the following     Read the value of the Chunk Time Stamp parameter     You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application  software by using the pylon API  You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data  The  following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode  enable the time stamp  chunk  run the parser  and retrieve the frame counter chunk data        make chunk mode active and enable Time Stamp chunk          Camera ChunkMo
136. e sure the Speed and Duplex Mode parameter is set to Auto Detect     If you use a different network adapter  see whether parameters are available that will allow  setting the number of receive descriptors and the number of CPU interrupts  The related  parameter names may differ from the ones used for the Intel PRO adapters  Also  the way of  setting the parameters may be different  You may  e g   have to use a parameter to set a low  number for the interrupt moderation and then use a different parameter to enable the interrupt  moderation     If possible  set the number of receive descriptors to a maximum value and set the number of  CPU interrupts to a low value     If possible  also set the parameter for speed and duplex to auto     Basler pilot 51    Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth    Contact Basler technical support if you need further assistance     Step 2   Set the Packet Size parameter on each camera as large as possible     Using the largest possible packet size has two advantages  it increases the efficiency of network  transmissions between the camera and the PC and it reduces the time required by the PC to  process incoming packets  The largest packet size setting that you can use with your camera is  determined by the largest packet size that can be handled by your network  The size of the packets  that can be handled by the network depends on the capabilities and settings of the network adapter  you are using and on capabilities of the ne
137. e the parameter values        Enable Resend       Camera_t  StreamGrabber_t StreamGrabber   Camera GetStreamGrabber 0        StreamGrabber EnableResend SetValue false      disable resends             Packet Timeout FrameRetention  Camera_t  StreamGrabber_t StreamGrabber   Camera GetStreamGrabber 0        StreamGrabber PacketTimeout SetValue  40          StreamGrabber FrameRetention SetValue  200       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference  AW000131xx000      You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     32 Basler pilot    Basler Network Drivers and Parameters    4 2 The Basler Performance Driver    The Basler performance driver is a hardware specific GigE Vision network driver compatible with  network adapters that use specific Intel chipsets  The main advantage of the performance driver is  that it significantly lowers the CPU load needed to service the network traffic between the PC and  the camera s   It also has a more robust packet resend mechanism     For more information about compatible Intel chipsets  see the Installation and Setup Guide for  Cameras Used with Basler   s pylon API   AW000611xx000      The performance driver uses two distinct  resend mechanisms  to trigger resend requests for  missing packets     The threshold resend mechanism  The timeout resend mechanism   
138. ea 25  E  electromagnetic interference    23  electrostatic discharge    ecce 23  2   Ig eee ainne ree 23  enable resend parametet              00  32  34  environmental requirements              00 24  OD eirean e a ret 23  event reporting        ee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeneeee 213  exposure   controlling with an ExTrig signal          84   overlapped ete 94  exposure active signal            eee 98  EXPOSUL AUTO   0 0    eee eee 189  236    exposure mode    UIMGO EEEE eae ee Rear 80  exposure MOdeS seenen 85  exposure Start delay      een 99  exposure time   maximum POSSIble               eee eee 91   minimum allowed    91   SOUUING erar a tert hates 92  exposure time abs parameter                 93  exposure time DASE seenen 92  exposure time base abs parameter          92  exposure time parameters    91  exposure time raw parameter    92  extended image data chunk                    200  external trigger signal   controlling exposure With    84   min high low timMe          eter eee 84  F  factory SETUP    eeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 220  222   auto functions factory setup              220   high gain factory setup    220   standard factory Setup    220  filter CriVeD         ecceeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 31  frame counter CHUNK         cee eeeeeeeeeees 202   VOSOU AEE A E E 203  frame rate   and averaging    102   controlling with a hardware trigger      84   controlling with a software trigger       82   maximum allowed    102   setting with a parameter             00 
139. ecute the  command        Camera TriggerSelector SetValue  TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart             Camera ExposureMode SetValue  ExposureMode_Timed             Camera  ExposureTimeAbs SetValue  3000          Camera TriggerActivation SetValue  TriggerActivation_RisingEdge       Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue  AcquisitionMode_SingleFrame          Camera AcquisitionStart Execute        For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     88 Basler pilot    Image Acquisition Control    For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29   For more information about the Trigger Ready signal  see Section 8 6 on page 96     For more information about the camera   s exposure time parameter  see Section 8 4 on page 91     8 3 4 Acquiring Images by Applying a Series of  Hardware Trigger Transitions    You can set the camera so that it will react to a continuous series of external hardware trigger   ExTrig  transitions and then you can cycle the ExTrig signal as desired to begin image acquisition   When you are using an ExTrig signal to start image acquisition  you should monitor the camera   s  trigger ready  TrigRdy  output signal and you should base the use of your ExTrig signal on the state  of the trigger ready signal     To set the camera to react continuously to ExTrig signal transitions  follow the se
140. ed aa Sees ee ee ee pe ed a ee eee es 163  11 6 1 Changing AOI Parameters  On the Fly           0 0 0    c eee eee eee 165   SE BUTI sts A he E a Dt E E Ee lg 2 AO 166  11 7 1 Considerations When Using Binning              0 0 0 e eee eee 168   Sa ROVEISE Kew r en stn Gal stipes s PoE Oe patna ae nema oe Mose ts Lakers 170   29  cAVOFAQING s raneto a ohare RAT Tee raat G Pe vie et bee ee eee Ee 173    10 Luminance Lookup Table      0 0    0    cee eee 176      1A GaMIM as sisentee in Balliol hae 8 eis woe Me ie A oleae ear oles wanes ete Shy 179   T2 Auto FUNCHONS ies Ate ia Pies og he a Abad ceed nb eo aS E a 180  11 12 1 Common Characteristics      0 0 0    eee 180   11 12 1 1 Modes of Operation           0 0 0  eee eee 181  11 12 1 2 Auto Function AOI    20    2 eee 182  11 12 1 3 Using an Auto Function          0 0 0    eee eee 186  e222  Gain Auto  swt tices ba ae Paes DENA eileen rh Ot ee deat PES 187  1112 3  Exposure  AUO niiet lade saws ye ey Yeates bea tee ewe as 189  11 12 4 Auto  Function  Profile  os 4 es cna neh tage ees Pete ee eee es 191  11 12 5 Balance White Auto    0    te eee 192    13 Disable Parameter Limits      0 0    0 0 0 0 ee tenes 194   ETA DODOUMGE fiesta tech SSB escalate are ay E A AI Ao tA E ale Steir bv E E dusts eg 195   15 Trigger Delay ssid teeth E ee bo DE BE Ag te Aad Ck be 197   AG ACQUISITION STAlUS etc ise cree nd gastos oe eel aae Sele dia a eens SOS Beare 198   TA Chunk Features  is ease sapere tear deae areas Siw aie inked hie leta 
141. een value for P4 bits 11    4   B3 Red value for P  bits 11    4   By Green value for P3 bits 3     0 Red value for Pz bits 3    0  Bs Green value for P3 bits 11    4   Be Red value for P4 bits 11     4   B7 Green value for Ps bits 3     0 Red value for P4 bits 3     0  Bg Green value for Ps bits 11     4   Bm 5 Red value for P  3 bits 11    4   Bm 4 Green value for Ph 2 bits 3     0 Red value for P  3 bits 3     0  Bm 3 Green value for P     bits 11     4   Bm 2 Red value for P    bits 11    4   Bm 1 Green value for P  bits 3     0 Red value for P    bits 3    0  Bm Green value for P  bits 11     4          When a color camera is set for Bayer GB 12 Packed  the pixel data output is 12 bit data of the     unsigned    type  The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels  are as shown in the table below                                         This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level   Hexadecimal   Decimal   OxOFFF 4095  OxOFFE 4094  0x0001 1  0x0000 0  126    Basler pilot    Pixel Data Formats    9 3 7 Bayer BG 12 Packed Format    When a color camera is set for the Bayer BG 12 Packed pixel dataformat  it outputs 12 bits of data  per pixel  Every three bytes transmitted by the camera contain data for two pixels     With the Bayer BG 12 Packed coding  the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way   So  for each pixel covered with a red lens in the sensor   s Bayer filter  you get 12 bits of red data   For each pixel covered with 
142. elector_Gain          Disable the limits for the selected featur       Camera RemoveLimits SetValue  true       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters  Note that the  disable parameter limits feature will only be available at the  guru  viewing level     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     194 Basler pilot    Features    11 14 Debouncer    The debouncer feature aids in discriminating between valid and invalid input signals and only lets  valid signals pass to the camera  The debouncer value specifies the minimum time that an input  signal must remain high or remain low in order to be considered a valid input signal        We recommend setting the debouncer value so that it is slightly greater than the     longest expected duration of an invalid signal     Setting the debouncer to a value that is too short will result in accepting invalid  signals  Setting the debouncer to a value that is too long will result in rejecting valid  signals                 Note that the debouncer delays a valid signal between its arrival at the camera and its transfer  The  duration of the delay will be determined by the debouncer value     The following diagram illustrates how the debouncer filters out invalid input signals  i e  signals that  are shorter than the debouncer value  The diagram al
143. elpful information such as frequently asked questions  downloads  and  application notes on the Basler website at   www baslerweb com indizes beitrag_index_en_22089 html    If you do decide to contact Basler technical support  please take a look at the form that appears on  the last two pages of this section before you call  Filling out this form will help make sure that you  have all of the information the Basler technical support team needs to help you with your problem     Whenever you want to return material to Basler  you must request a Return Material Authorization   RMA  number before sending it back  The RMA number must be stated in your delivery  documents when you ship your material to us  Please be aware that if you return material without  an RMA number  we reserve the right to reject the material     You can find detailed information about how to obtain an RMA number on the Basler website at   www baslerweb com beitraege beitrag_en_79701 html    Basler pilot 225    Troubleshooting and Support    12 2 Before Contacting Basler    Technical Support    To help you as quickly and efficiently as possible when you have a problem with a Basler camera   it is important that you collect several pieces of information before you contact Basler technical  support     Copy the form that appears on the next two pages  fill it out  and fax the pages to your local dealer  or to your nearest Basler support center  Or  you can send an e mail listing the requested pieces of  informa
144. en the  once  mode of operation is  selected  the parameter values are automatically adjusted until the related image property  reaches the target value  After the automatic parameter value adjustment is complete  the auto  function will automatically be set to  off  and the new parameter value will be applied to the  following images     The parameter value can be changed by using the  once  mode of operation again  by using  the  continuous  mode of operation  or by manual adjustment     Some auto functions also provide a  continuous  mode of operation where the parameter value  is adjusted repeatedly while images are acquired     Depending on the current frame rate  the automatic adjustments will usually be carried out for  every or every other image  unless the camera   s microcontroller is kept busy by other tasks     The repeated automatic adjustment will proceed until the  once  mode of operation is used or  until the auto function is set to  off   in which case the parameter value resulting from the latest  automatic adjustment will operate unless it is manually adjusted     When an auto function is set to  off   the parameter value resulting from the latest automatic  adjustment will operate unless it is manually adjusted        You can enable auto functions and change their settings while the camera is  capturing images   on the fly             while the camera was continuously capturing images  the auto function will  become effective with a short delay and the fir
145. enables averaging and sets 3 individual images to be averaged  Setting  the parameter   s value to 1 disables averaging     You can set the AveragingNumberOfFrames parameter value from within your application software  by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter  value           Enable averaging of 3 images    Camera AveragingNumberOfFrames SetValue  3        Disable averaging  Camera AveragingNumberOfFrames SetValue  1       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     Basler pilot 175    Features    11 10 Luminance Lookup Table    The camera can capture pixel values at a 12 bit depth  When a monochrome camera is set for the  Mono 16 or Mono 12 packed pixel format  the camera outputs 12 effective bits  Normally  the 12  effective bits directly represent the 12 bit output from the camera   s ADC  The luminance lookup  table feature lets you use a custom 12 bit to 12 bit lookup table to map the 12 bit output from the  ADC to 12 bit values of your choice     The lookup table is essentially just a list of 4096 values  however  not every value is the table is  actually used  If we number the values in the table from 0 through 4095  the table works like this     The number at location 0 in the table represents the 12 bit value that will be transmitted out of  the came
146. ent pixel  data format  on the current settings for binning  and on whether or not the Gain Raw parameter  limits for the manually set gain feature are disabled     The target average gray value may range from 0  black  to 255  white   Note that this range of  numbers applies to 8 bit and to 16 bit  12 bit effective  output modes  Accordingly  also for 16 bit  output modes  black is represented by 0 and white by 255     You can carry out steps 1 to 6 from within your application software by using the pylon API  The  following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the parameter values     Selecting and setting Auto Function AOI    Setting the limits for the Auto Gain Raw parameter value  The currently accessible minimum  and maximum parameter values are chosen as examples    Setting the target average gray value  A medium gray value is chosen as an example  Enabling the gain auto function and selecting  for example  the  once  mode of operation    Basler pilot 187    Features       Select the appropriate auto function AOI for luminance statistics     Currently AutoFunctionAOISelector_AOI1 is predefined to gather     luminance statistics       Set position and size of the auto function AOI       Camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue  AutoFunctionAOISelector_AOIl1     Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetxX SetValue  0     Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetY SetValue  0     Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue  Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax       Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight Set
147. enter of the die   Maximum Sensor Tilt Angle  Degrees   A Camera Tiitx   Tity    piA640 210gm gc   0 48 0 63  Z piA1000 48gm gc 0 31 0 31  f  piA1600 35gm gc 0 19 0 26    piA1900 32gm gc 0 16 0 29    piA2400 12gm gc 0 27 0 32  piA2400 17gm gc 0 27 0 32  17 5  This tolerance is for the distance between the front of the          lens mount and the sensor   s photosensitive surface   Note that this tolerance and the sensor tilt tolerance  see  above  must be combined to obtain the total tolerance for  every point on the photosensitive surface      Fig  14  Sensor Positioning Accuracy for Cameras With 90   Head Housing  in mm unless otherwise noted     Basler pilot 19    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    1 5 3 Maximum Thread Length on Color Cameras    The C mount lens adapter on color models of the camera is normally equipped with an internal IR  cut filter  As shown below  the length of the threads on any lens you use with a color camera must  be less than 8 0 mm  If a lens with a longer thread length is used  the IR cut filter will be damaged  or destroyed and the camera will no longer operate      lt  8 0 mm  Not to Scale                                                                      O  O  C mount Lens    IR Cut Filt  Lens Adapter E  Fig  15  Maximum Lens Thread Length on Color Cameras  Note  C mount color cameras that do not include an internal IR cut filter are available    on request     Monochrome cameras are not normally equipped with an internal IR c
148. er  if you are debugging an application and you stop  at a break point  you will have a problem with the heartbeat timer  The timer  will time out when you stop at a break point and the connection to the camera  will be lost  When debugging  you should increase the heartbeat timeout to a  high value to avoid heartbeat timeouts at break points  When debugging is  complete  you should return the timeout to its normal setting     You can set the driver related transport layer parameter values from within your application software  by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to read and write the  parameter values        Read Write Timeout  Camera_t  TlParams_t TlParams  Camera GetTLNodeMap       TlParams ReadTimeout SetValue  500      500 milliseconds             TlParams WriteTimeout SetValue  500      500 milliseconds       Heartbeat Timeout  Camera_t  TlParams_t TlParams  Camera GetTLNodeMap       TlParams HeartbeatTimeout SetValue 5000      5 seconds       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     Basler pilot 41    Basler Network Drivers and Parameters    42    Basler pilot    Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth    5 Network Related Camera  Parameters and Managing  Bandwidth    This section describes the camera parameters that are related to the camera   s p
149. ere actually working with a 216 column by  162 line sensor when setting your AOI parameters  The maximum AOI width would be 216 and the  maximum AOI height would be 162  When you set the X Offset and the Width for the AOI  you will  be setting these values in terms of virtual sensor columns  And when you set the Y Offset and the  Height for the AOI  you will be setting these values in terms of virtual sensor lines     For more informtion about the area of interest  AOI  feature  see Section 11 6 on page 163    168 Basler pilot    Features    Binning   s Effect on the Sensor Readout and Frame Rate Formulas    In several areas of the manual  formulas appear for sensor readout time and for calculating the  maximum frame rate  In several of these formulas  you must enter the current height of the area of  interest  AOI   If you are not using binning  you would enter the height of the AOI in physical sensor  lines  If binning is enabled  however  you must use the concept of a  virtual  sensor as described  above and the height of the AOI that you use in the formulas would be in terms of virtual sensor  lines     The affected formulas appear on page 100 and on page 103     Basler pilot 169    Features    11 8 Reverse X    The reverse X feature is a horizontal mirror image feature  When the reverse X feature is enabled   the pixel values for each line in a captured image will be swapped end for end about the line   s cen   ter  This means that for each line  the value of the first p
150. erformance in most cases     Basler pilot 223    Features    11 21 4Selecting the Startup Set    You can select the default configuration set  i e   whichever was selected as the default  configuration set  either the Standard Factory Setup  the High Gain Factory Setup  or the Auto  Functions Factory Setup  or one of the user configuration sets stored in the camera   s non volatile  memory to be the  startup set   The configuration set that you designate as the startup set will be  loaded into the active set whenever the camera starts up at power on or after a reset     The User Set Default Selector is used to select the startup set   Set the User Set Default Selector to User Set 1  User Set 2  User Set 3 or Default     You can set the User Set Default Selector from within your application software by using the pylon  API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector        Camera UserSetDefaultSelector SetValue  UserSetDefaultSelector_Default       224 Basler pilot    Troubleshooting and Support    12 Troubleshooting and Support    This section outlines the resources available to you if you need help working with your camera     12 1 Technical Support Resources    If you need advice about your camera or if you need assistance troubleshooting a problem with your  camera  you can contact the Basler technical support team for your area  Basler technical support  contact information is located in the front pages of this manual     You will also find h
151. erformance on the  network  It also describes how to use the parameters to manage the available network bandwidth  when you are using multiple cameras     5 1 Network Related  Parameters in the Camera    The camera includes several parameters that determine how it will use its network connection to  transmit data to the host PC  The list below describes each parameter and provides basic  information about how the parameter is used  The following section describes how you can use the  parameters to manage the bandwidth used by each camera on your network     Payload Size  read only     Indicates the total size in bytes of the image data plus any chunk data  if chunks are enabled  that  the camera will transmit  Packet headers are not included     Stream Channel Selector  read write     The GigE Vision standard specifies a mechanism for establishing several separate stream channels  between the camera and the PC  This parameter selects the stream channel that will be affected  when the other network related parameters are changed     Currently  the cameras support only one stream channel  i e   stream channel 0     Packet Size  read write     As specified in the GigE Vision standard  each acquired image will be fit into a data block  The block  contains three elements  a data leader consisting of one packet used to signal the beginning of a  data block  the data payload consisting of one or more packets containing the actual data for the  current block  and a data trailer consi
152. erlaps the Auto Function AOI  see  c  in Figure 52   only the  pixel data from the area of partial overlap will be used to control the image property    If the Auto Function AOI does not overlap the Image AOI  see  d  in Figure 52   the Auto  Function will not or only to a limited degree control the image property  For details  see the  sections below  describing the individual auto functions              We strongly recommend completely including the Auto Function AOI in the Image  AOI  or  depending on your needs  choosing identical positions and sizes for Auto  Function AOI and Image AOI                       You can use auto functions when also using the reverse X feature  For information  about the behavior and roles of Auto Function AOI and Image AOI when also  using the reverse X feature  see the  Reverse X  section           Basler pilot    183    Features    012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30                                                                               Auto Function AOI                                                                  BoC eo Image AOI                                                                                                                                                                                  iiia  a           0123 465 67 8 9 10 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30    12 13 14 15 16 17 18                                                                                           
153. esends available via the bandwidth reserve are used and 2  resends are used from the accumulator pool  The accumulator pool is drawn down to 13     You trigger image acquisition and during this time period  the camera acquires and transmits  a frame  The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period and 4  resends are needed  The 4 resends needed are taken from the resends available via the  bandwidth reserve  The fifth resend available via the bandwidth reserve is not needed  so it is  added to the accumulator pool and brings the pool to 14     You trigger image acquisition and during this time period  the camera acquires and transmits  a frame  The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period  but 10  resends are needed  The 5 resends available via the bandwidth reserve are used and 5  resends are used from the accumulator pool  The accumulator pool is drawn down to 9     You trigger image acquisition and during this time period  the camera acquires and transmits  a frame  The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period  but 20  resends are needed  The 5 resends available via the bandwidth reserve are used  To  complete all of the needed resends  15 resends would be required from the accumulator pool   but the pool only has 9 resends  So the 9 resends in the pool are used and 6 resend requests  are answered with a  packet unavailable  error code  The accumulator pool is reduced to 0     Basler 
154. et                                     Auto  Function  Area of  Interest          oo oo NID oa A O N               Height                                  Image  Area of  Interest                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     X Offset    Fig  51  Auto Function Area of Interest and Image Area of Interest    182 Basler pilot    Features    Relative Positioning of an Auto Function AOI    The size and position of an Auto Function AOI can be  but need not be  identical to the size and  position of the Image AOI  Note that the overlap between Auto Function AOI and Image AOI  determines whether and to what extent the auto function will control the related image property   Only the pixel data from the areas of overlap will be used by the auto function to control the image  property of the entire image     Different degrees of overlap are illustrated in Figure 52  The hatched areas in the figure indicate  areas of overlap     If the Auto Function AOI is completely included in the Image AOI  see  a  in Figure 52   the  pixel data from the Auto Function AOI will be used to control the image property    If the Image AOI is completely included in the Auto Function AOI  see  b  in Figure 52   only  the pixel data from the Image AOI will be used to control the image property    If the Image AOI only partially ov
155. etting the param   eter   s value to 2  3  or 4 enables horizontal binning by 2  horizontal binning by 3  or horizontal bin   ning by 4 respectively  Setting the parameter   s value to 1 disables horizontal binning     You can set the Binning Vertical or the Binning Horizontal parameter value from within your  application software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to  set the parameter values           Enable vertical binning by 2    Camera BinningVertical SetValue  2             Enable horizontal binning by 4    Camera BinningHorizontal SetValue  4          Disable vertical and horizontal binning  Camera BinningVertical SetValue  1       Camera BinningHorizontal SetValue  1       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     Basler pilot 167    Features    11 7 1 Considerations When Using Binning    Increased Response to Light    Using binning can greatly increase the camera   s response to light  When binning is enabled  ac   quired images may look overexposed  If this is the case  you can reduce the lens aperture  reduce  the intensity of your illumination  reduce the camera   s exposure time setting  or reduce the camera   s  gain setting     Reduced Resolution    Using binning effectively reduces the resolution of the camera   s imaging sensor  For example  the  sensor 
156. etwork adapter is overwhelmed  if all of the cameras simultaneously begin to transmit image data at once  The frame transmission  delay parameter can be used to stagger the start of image data transmission from each camera     Bandwidth Assigned  read only     Indicates the bandwidth in bytes per second that will be used by the camera to transmit image and  chunk feature data and to handle resends and control data transmissions  The value of this  parameter is a result of the packet size and the inter packet delay parameter settings     In essence  the bandwidth assigned is calculated this way     X Packets _ Y Bytes  Sa a a  Frame Packet  X Packets Y Bytes 8ns l   X Packets  DRT acketS 7 Y Bytes ons AT AURED _  Frame Packet Byte Frame    Bandwidth Assigned    1  x  IPD x 8 ns       Where  X   number of packets needed to transmit the frame  Y   number of bytes in each packet  IPD   Inter packet Delay setting in ticks  with a tick set to the 8 ns standard     When considering this formula  you should know that on a Gigabit network it takes one tick to  transmit one byte  Also  be aware that the formula has been simplified for easier understanding     44 Basler pilot    Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth    Bandwidth Reserve  read write     Used to reserve a portion of the assigned bandwidth for packet resends and for the transmission of  control data between the camera and the host PC  The setting is expressed as a percentage of the  Bandwidth Assigned pa
157. ey eR et ee ts E 199  11 17 1 What Are Chunk Features     0    0    eee 199  11 17 2 Making the  Chunk Mode  Active and Enabling the Extended Data Stamp   200  11 17 38 Frame Counter        0 0 0    eee 202  TAAZ 4 TIME  Stamp iaa ees ee ea hea ake eee ee eee ee 205  11 17 5 Trigger Input Counter      0 2    eee 206  TAG 7 6 Line Status Alls cease eo ey eared eal ee eee eee ee a ee E 209  IT CRO CHECKSUM feces so a ea pe eee Va eee Bee oe ae eee eed 211    18 Event Reporting           0    cee eens 213   AQ MOStIMAGES serren ten Sten eae a ode ok eee een eee eet Ae 215    20 Device Information Parameters       22 24 anasan ansann diate eee ee ee ee ee 218    21 Configuration Sets    0 0 0    ce ete eee 220  11 21 1 Saving User Sets    2 0 0    ce eee 221  11 21 2 Selecting a Factory Setup as the Default Set                     00   222  11 21 3 Loading a Saved Set or the Default Set into the Active Set               223  11 21 4 Selecting the Startup Set      2 0    0  eee 224    Basler pilot    Table of Contents    12 Troubleshooting and Support           00  cece eee eee 225  12 1 Technical Support Resources        0 0    cee eee 225  12 2 Before Contacting Basler Technical Support              00 00  226   Revision FISTOLY 22 42 22s ee Sites Se eet eset ook ee betes oa pee eatnde alee  229   FECODACK o 9226 23 raae Sok ads ee SF n oe ee Ge See A ee I Se ee ee 233   DUA Nese ace ch as echo sd ance natin ee te Gh a te alata elec Neth athe She Ae lt 235    Basler pilot v    T
158. g consecutive packets 997 to 999  The resend requests are sent  after packet 996   the last packet of the intact sequence of packets   has advanced beyond the  resend request threshold and before packet 1000   the next packet in the stream of packets   can  advance beyond the resend request threshold  Similarly  a resend request will be sent for missing  packet 1002 after packet 1001 has advanced beyond the resend request threshold and before  packet 1003 can advance beyond the resend request threshold     Resend Request Batching   This parameter determines the location of the resend request  batching threshold in the receive window  Figure 16   The parameter value is in per cent of a span  that starts with the resend request threshold and ends with the front end of the receive window  The  maximum allowed parameter value is 100  In Figure 16 the resend request batching threshold is set  at 80  of the span     The resend request batching threshold relates to consecutive missing packets  i e   to a continuous  sequence of missing packets  Resend request batching allows grouping of consecutive missing  packets for a single resend request rather than sending a sequence of resend requests where each  resend request relates to just one missing packet     The location of the resend request batching threshold determines the maximum number of  consecutive missing packets that can be grouped together for a single resend request  The  maximum number corresponds to the number of packets
159. goes through a two step conversion process as it exits the sensor and passes through the  camera   s electronics  This process yields Y  U  and V color information for each pixel     In the first step of the process  an interpolation algorithm is performed to get full RGB data for each  pixel  This is required because color cameras use a Bayer filter on the sensor and each individual  pixel gathers information for only one color     For more information on the Bayer filter  see Section 9 3 1 on page 115     The second step of the process is to convert the RGB information to the YUV color model  The  conversion algorithm uses the following formulas     Y  0 30R   0 59G   0 11B  U   0 17 R   0 33 G   0 50 B  V 0 50 R   0 41 G   0 09B    Once the conversion to a YUV color model is complete  the pixel data is transmitted to the host PC     Note      The values for U and for V normally range from  128 to  127  Because the  camera transfers U values and V values with unsigned integers  128 is added  to each U value and to each V value before the values are transferred from  the camera  This process allows the values to be transferred on a scale that  ranges from 0 to 255     Basler pilot 129    Pixel Data Formats    The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer    in your PC when the camera is set for YUV 4 2 2 Packed output   The following standards are used in the table    Pg   the first pixel transmitted by the camera   Ph 
160. hange the setting for the Exposure Time Abs parameter to the nearest achieveable value     You should also be aware that if you change the exposure time using the raw settings  the Exposure  Time Abs parameter will automatically be updated to reflect the new exposure time   Setting the Absolute Exposure Time Parameter    You can set the Exposure Time Abs parameter value from within your application software by using  the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value           Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue  124                double resultingExpTime   Camera ExposureTimeAbs GetValue        For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     Basler pilot 93    Image Acquisition Control    8 5 Overlapping Exposure and Sensor  Readout    The image acquisition process on the camera includes two distinct parts  The first part is the  exposure of the pixels in the imaging sensor  Once exposure is complete  the second part of the  process     readout of the pixel values from the sensor     takes place     In regard to this image acquisition process  there are two common ways for the camera to operate   with    non overlapped    exposure and with    overlapped    exposure  In the non overlapped mode of  operati
161. he Physical  Interface section of this manual     You can use the Line Status or Line Status All parameters to monitor the state of the input line that  is receiving the user defined signal     Note     The line assigned to receive the ExTrig input signal can   t be used to receive a  user designed input signal     For more information about using the Line Status and Line Status All parameters  see  Section 10 3 1 on page 147 and Section 10 3 2 on page 147     138 Basler pilot    1 O Control    10 2 Configuring Output Lines    10 2 1 Assigning a Camera Output Signal to a Physical  Output Line    You can use the camera   s output signal assignment capability to assign one of the camera   s  standard output signals as the source signal for a physical output line  The camera has a variety of  standard output signals available including    Exposure Active   Trigger Ready   Timer 1  Timer 2  Timer 3  Timer 4    You can also designate an output line as  user settable     If an output line is designated as a user  settable  you can use the camera   s API to set the state of the line as desired     To assign an output signal to an output line or to designate the line as user settable     Use the Line Selector to select Output Line 1  Output Line 2  Output Line 3  or Output Line 4     Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to one of the available output signals or to user  settable  This will set the source signal for the selected line     Note     By default  the Exposure Active 
162. he automatically adjusted  absolute   exposure time and the settable limits for parameter value adjustment are not restricted to multiples  of the current exposure time base     The exposure auto function uses Auto Function AOI1 and can be operated in the  once  and  continuous  modes of operation     If Auto Function AOI does not overlap the Image AOI  see the  Auto Function AOI  section  the  pixel data from Auto Function AOI1 will not be used to control the image brightness  Instead  the  current manual setting of the Exposure Time Abs parameter value will control the image brightness     The exposure auto function is not available  when trigger width exposure mode is selected     When the exposure auto function is used  the gain auto function can be used at the same time  In  this case  however  you must also set the auto function profile feature        If the Auto Exposure Time Abs Upper Limit parameter is set to a sufficiently high  value the camera   s frame rate may be decreased                 For more information about  absolute  exposure time settings and related limitations  see  Section 8 4 2 on page 93     For more information about exposure modes and how to select them  see Section 8 2 1 on page 80  and Section 8 3 1 on page 85     For more information about the auto function profile feature  see Section 11 12 4 on page 191     To use the exposure auto function  carry out the following steps     Make sure trigger width exposure mode is not selected    Select Au
163. he four  unused most significant bits are filled with zeros     With the Bayer BG 16 the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way  So  for each pixel  covered with a red lens  you get 12 effective bits of red data  For each pixel covered with a green  lens  you get 12 effective bits of green data  And for each pixel covered with a blue lens  you get 12  effective bits of blue data   This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as  raw  output      The  BG  in the name Bayer BG 16 refers to the alignment of the colors in the Bayer filter to the  pixels in the acquired images  For even lines in the images  pixel one will be blue  pixel two will be  green  pixel three will be blue  pixel four will be green  etc  For odd lines in the images  pixel one  will be green  pixel two will be red  pixel three will be green  pixel four will be red  etc     The tables below describe how the data for the even lines and for the odd lines of a received frame  will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer BG 16 output  Note  that the data is placed in the image buffer in little endian format     The following standards are used in the tables    Po   the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a line  Ph   the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a line  Bg   the first byte of data for a line    Bm   the last byte of data for a line                                                                                                           
164. hen the event occurred   The time stamp  timer starts running at power off on or at camera reset  The unit for the timer is  ticks  where  one tick   8 ns  The timestamp is a 64 bit value      2  The event is placed in an internal queue in the camera     3  As soon as network transmission time is available  the camera will transmit an event message   If only one event is in the queue  the message will contain the single event  If more than one  event is in the queue  the message will contain multiple events    a  After the camera sends an event message  it waits for an acknowledgement  If no  acknowledgement is received within a specified timeout  the camera will resend the event  message  If an acknowledgement is still not received  the timeout and resend mechanism  will repeat until a specified maximum number of retrys is reached  If the maximum number  of retrys is reached and no acknowledge has been received  the message will be dropped     During the time that the camera is waiting for an acknowledgement  no new event  messages can be transmitted     The Event Queue    As mentioned in the example above  the camera has an event queue  The intention of the queue is  to handle short term delays in the camera   s ability to access the network and send event messages   When event reporting is working  smoothly   a single event will be placed in the queue and this  event will be sent to the PC in an event message before the next event is placed in queue  If there  is an occasi
165. htness value for Po  B4 High byte of brightness value for Po  Bo Low byte of brightness value for P4  B3 High byte of brightness value for P4  B4 Low byte of brightness value for Po  Bs High byte of brightness value for Po  Be Low byte of brightness value for P3  B7 High byte of brightness value for P3  Bg Low byte of brightness value for P4  Bo High byte of brightness value for P4  Bm 7 Low byte of brightness value for P  3  Bm 6 High byte of brightness value for P  3  Bm 5 Low byte of brightness value for P      Bm 4 High byte of brightness value for Ph 2  Bm 3 Low byte of brightness value for Ph 1  Bm 2 High byte of brightness value for Ph 4  Bm 1 Low byte of brightness value for Ph  Bm High byte of brightness value for Ph          110    Basler pilot    Pixel Data Formats    When the camera is set for Mono 16  the pixel data output is 16 bit data of the    unsigned short  little  endian     type  The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are  as shown in the table below  Note that for 16 bit data  you might expect a value range from 0x0000  to OxFFFF  However  with the camera set for Mono16 only 12 bits of the 16 bits transmitted are   effective  Therefore  the highest data value you will see is OXOFFF indicating a signal level of 4095                                         This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level   Hexadecimal   Decimal   OxOFFF 4095  OxOFFE 4094  0x0001 1  0x0000 0  Note  When a camera that is set for Mono 16 h
166. hunk feature  Making the chunk mode inactive  disables all chunk features     To enable the line status all chunk     Use the Chunk Selector to select the Line Status All chunk   Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true     Once the line status all chunk is enabled  the camera will add a line status all chunk to each  acquired image     To retrieve data from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC  you must  first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser included in the pylon API   Once the chunk parser has been used  you can retrieve the line status all information by doing the  following     Read the value of the Chunk Line Status All parameter     You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application  software by using the pylon API  You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data  The  following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode  enable the line status  all chunk  run the parser  and retrieve the line status all chunk data           make chunk mode active and enable Line Status All chunk  Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue  true     Camera ChunkSelector SetValue  ChunkSelector_LineStatusAll     Camera ChunkEnable SetValue  true                   Basler pilot 209    Features       retrieve data from the chunk    IChunkParser  amp ChunkParser    Camera CreateChunkParser           GrabResult Result   StreamGrabber RetrieveResult
167. hunk mode must be active before you can enable the trigger input  counter feature or any of the other chunk feature  Making the chunk mode  inactive disables all chunk features     To enable the trigger input counter chunk   Use the Chunk Selector to select the Trigger Input Counter chunk   Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true     Once the trigger input counter chunk is enabled  the camera will add a trigger input counter chunk  to each acquired image     To retrieve data from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC  you must  first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser included in the pylon API   Once the chunk parser has been used  you can retrieve the trigger input counter information by  doing the following     Read the value of the Chunk Trigger Input Counter parameter     You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application  software by using the pylon API  You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data  The  following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode  enable the trigger input  counter chunk  run the parser  and retrieve the trigger input counter chunk data        make chunk mode active and enable Trigger Input Counter chunk             Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue  true       Camera ChunkSelector SetValue  ChunkSelector_Triggerinputcounter          Camera ChunkEnable SetValue  true       206 Basler pilot   
168. ified Range Can Cause Damage    If the voltage of the power to the camera is greater than  30 0 VDC damage  to the camera can result  If the voltage is less than  11 3 VDC  the camera  may operate erratically     An Incorrect Plug Can Damage the 12 pin Connector    The plug on the cable that you attach to the camera   s 12 pin connector must  have 12 pins  Use of a smaller plug  such as one with 10 pins or 8 pins  can  damage the pins in the camera   s 12 pin connector     The following voltage requirements apply to the camera power VCC  pins 8 and 9 of the 12 pin    receptacle         Voltage    Significance        lt   11 3 VDC    The camera may operate erratically         12 to  24 VDC    Recommended operating voltage   lt  1   ripple required  Make sure to use a power  supply that supplies power in this voltage range         30 0 VDC       Absolute maximum  the camera may be damaged when the absolute maximum is  exceeded              Table 6  Voltage Requirements for the Camera Power VCC    For more information about the 12 pin connector and the power and I O cables see Section 7 2 on  page 62  Section 7 3 on page 64  and Section 7 4 on page 65     68    Basler pilot    Physical Interface    7 6 Ethernet GigE Device Information    The camera uses a standard Ethernet GigE transceiver  The transceiver is fully 100 1000 Base T  802 3 compliant     Basler pilot 69    Physical Interface    7 7 Input and Output Lines    7 7 1 Input Lines    7 7 1 1 Voltage Requirements    Note 
169. iggers resulted in image acquisitions     Basler pilot 207    Features    Trigger Input Counter Reset    Whenever the camera is powered off  the trigger input counter will reset to 0  During operation  you  can reset the trigger input counter via I O input 1  I O input 2 or software  and you can disable the  reset  By default  the trigger input counter reset is disabled     To use the trigger input counter reset     Configure the trigger input counter reset by setting the counter selector to Counter1 and setting  the counter event source to FrametTrigger     Set the counter reset source to Line1  Line2  Software or to Off   Execute the command if using software as the counter reset source     You can set the trigger input counter reset parameter values from within your application software  by using the pylon API  The following code snippets illustrate using the API to configure and set the  trigger input counter reset and to execute a reset via software        configure reset of trigger input counter    Camera CounterSelector SetValue  CounterSelector_Counterl             Camera CounterEventSource SetValue  CounterEventSource_FrameTrigger          select reset by signal on input line 1          Camera CounterResetSource SetValue  CounterResetSource_Linel          select reset by signal on input line 2    Camera CounterResetSource SetValue  CounterResetSource_Line2             select reset by software    Camera CounterResetSource SetValue  CounterResetSource_Software         
170. image data from the sensor to the point where it begins transmitting the  data for the acquired image from the buffer to the host PC     Note that  if the averaging feature is used  the concept of the transmission start delay  as described  above  does not apply  In this case  the acquired images are not transmitted individually but will be  used for creating an averaged image which is transmitted     The exposure start delay varies from camera model to camera model  The table below shows the  exposure start delay for each camera model                                   Camera Model Exposure Start Delay  piA640 210gm gc 23 64 us  piA1000 48gm gc 24 64 us  piA1600 35gm gc 65 98 us  piA1900 32gm gc 101 45 us  piA2400 12gm gc 66 60 us  piA2400 17gm gc 32 06 us       Table 11  Exposure Start Delays    Basler pilot 99    Image Acquisition Control    Note that  if the debouncer feature is used  the debouncer setting for the input line must be added  to the exposure start delays shown in Table 11 to determine the total start delay  For example   assume that you are using an piA640 210 camera and that you have set the cameras for hardware  triggering  Also assume that you have selected input line 1 to accept the hardware trigger signal  and that you have set the Line Debouncer Time Abs parameter for input line 1 to 5 us  In this case     Total Start Delay   Start Delay from Table 11  Debouncer Setting  Total Start Delay   12 44 us  5 us  Total Start Delay   17 44 us    TrigRdy    Sign
171. in the piA640 210gm camera normally has a resolution of 648  H  x 488  V   If you set this  camera to use horizontal binning by 3 and vertical binning by 3  the effective resolution of the sensor  is reduced to 216  H  by 162  V    Note that the 488 pixel vertical dimension of the sensor was not  evenly divisible by 3  so we rounded down to the nearest whole number      Possible Image Distortion    Objects will only appear undistorted in the image if the numers of binned lines and columns are  equal  With all other combinations  the imaged objects will appear distorted  If  for example  vertical  binning by 2 is combined with horizontal binning by 4 the widths of the imaged objects will appear  shrunk by a factor of 2 compared to the heights     If you want to preserve the aspect ratios of imaged objects when using binning you must use vertical  and horizontal binning where equal numbers of lines and columns are binned  e g  vertical binning  by 3 combined with horizontal binning by 3     Binning   s Effect on AOI Settings    When you have the camera set to use binning  keep in mind that the settings for your area of interest   AOI  will refer to the binned lines and columns in the sensor and not to the physical lines in the  sensor as they normally would  Another way to think of this is by using the concept of a  virtual sen   sor   For example  assume that you are using a piA640 210gm camera set for 3 by 3 binning as  described above  In this case  you would act as if you w
172. includes the LWIP TCP IP implementation  The copyright information  for this implementation is as follows     Copyright  c  2001  2002 Swedish Institute of Computer Science  All rights reserved     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without modification  are permitted  provided that the following conditions are met     1  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice  this list of conditions  and the following disclaimer     2  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice  this list of conditions  and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the  distribution     3  The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this  software without specific prior written permission     THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR    AS IS  AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED     IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT  INDIRECT  INCIDENTAL   SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED  TO  PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS OF USE  DATA  OR  PROFITS  OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION  HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF  LIABILITY  WHETHER IN CONTRACT  STRICT LIABILITY  OR TORT  INCLUDING  NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE  ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  SOFTWARE  E
173. ing acamera  design in for a new project     The pylon Viewer is included in Basler   s pylon Driver Package  You can download the pylon  package from the Basler website  www baslerweb com beitraege beitrag_en_71708 html     For more information about using the viewer  see the installation and Setup Guide for Cameras  Used with Basler   s pylon API   AW000611xx000   You can download the guide from the Basler  website  www baslerweb com indizes download_index_en_19627 html     3 2 The IP Configuration Tool    The Basler IP Configuration Tool is a standalone application that lets you change the IP  configuration of the camera via a GUI  The tool will detect all Basler GigE cameras attached to your  network and let you make changes to a selected camera     The IP Configuration Tool is included in Basler   s pylon Driver Package  You can download the pylon  package from the Basler website  www baslerweb com beitraege beitrag_en_71708 html     For more information about using IP Configuration Tool  see the installation and Setup Guide for  Cameras Used with Basler   s pylon API   AW000611xx000   You can download the guide from the  Basler website  www baslerweb com indizes download_index_en_19627 html     Basler pilot 29    Tools for Changing Camera Parameters    3 3 The pylon API    You can access all of the camera   s parameters and can control the camera   s full functionality from  within your application software by using Basler   s pylon API  The Basler pylon Programmer   s 
174. ion plus the  bandwidth that is reserved for packet resents and camera control signals  To determine the    data  bandwidth assigned     you must subtract out the reserve     Basler pilot 53    Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth    You can use the formula below to determine the actual amount of assigned bandwidth that is  available for data transmission  To use the formula  you will need to know the current value of the  Bandwidth Assigned parameter and the Bandwidth reserve parameter for each camera     100     Bandwidth Reserved    Data Bandwidth Assigned   Bandwidth Assigned x 100    Step 6   For each camera  compare the data bandwidth needed with the data bandwidth  assigned     For each camera  you should now compare the data bandwidth assigned to the camera  as  determined in step 4  with the bandwidth needed by the camera  as determined in step 3      For bandwidth to be used most efficiently  the data bandwidth assigned to a camera should be equal  to or just slightly greater than the data bandwidth needed by the camera  If you find that this is the  situation for all of the cameras on the network  you can go on to step 6 now  If you find a camera  that has much more data bandwidth assigned than it needs  you should make an adjustment     To lower the amount of data bandwidth assigned  you must adjust a parameter called the Inter   packet Delay  If you increase the Inter packet Delay parameter value on a camera  the data  bandwidth assigned to th
175. is set to 1 2  the intensity of that color will be increased by  20      The balance ratio value can range from 0 00 to 3 98  But you should be aware that if you set the  balance ratio for a color to a value lower than 1  this will not only decrease the intensity of that color  relative to the other two colors  but will also decrease the maximum intensity that the color can  achieve  For this reason  we don   t normally recommend setting a balance ratio less than 1 unless  you want to correct for the strong predominance of one color     To set the Balance Ratio parameter for a color     Set the Balance Ratio Selector to red  green  or blue   Set the Balance Ratio Abs parameter to the desired value for the selected color     You can set the Balance Ratio Selector and the Balance Ratio Abs parameter value from within your  application software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to  set the selector and the parameter value     Camera BalanceRatioSelector SetValue  BalanceRatioSelector_Green          Camera BalanceRatioAbs SetValue  1 20       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     Basler pilot 155    Features    11 4 Digital Shift    The digital shift feature lets you change the group of bits that
176. ixel in the line will be swapped with the value  of the last pixel  the value of the second pixel in the line will be swapped with the value of the next   to last pixel  and so on     Figure 47 shows a normal image on the left and an image captured with reverse X enabled on the  right     Normal Image Mirror Image       Fig  47  Reverse X Mirror Imaging    Using AOls with Reverse X    You can use the AOI feature when using the reverse X feature  Note  however  that the position of  an AOI relative to the sensor remains the same regardless of whether or not the reverse X feature  is enabled     As aconsequence  an AOI will display different images depending on whether or not the reverse X  feature is enabled     170 Basler pilot    Features    Normal Image Mirror Image    eooecooooce    Onn aS  ZBE    oocooocooocoooos Lhe aT e     m ng       AOI AOI    Fig  48  Using an AOI with Reverse X Mirror Imaging    Note  For color cameras  provisions are made ensuring that the effective color filter    alignment will be constant for both  normal and mirror images     Note     AOls used for the auto function feature will behave analogous to  standard   AOls     Depending on whether or not the reverse X feature is enabled  an Image  AOI will display different images and an Auto Function AOI will refer to  different image contents     The positions of the AOls relative to the sensor will not change     For more information about auto functions  see Section 11 12 on page 180    Basler pilo
177. l only appear in the viewer if the performance driver is installed  on the adapter to which your camera is connected      For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     Basler pilot 39    Basler Network Drivers and Parameters    Adapter Properties  When the Basler Performance driver is installed  it adds a set of  advanced  properties to the  network adapter  These properties include     Max Packet Latency   A value in microseconds that defines how long the adapter will wait after it  receives a packet before it generates a packet received interrupt     Max Receive Inter packet Delay   A value in microseconds that defines the maximum amount of  time allowed between incoming packets     Maximum Interrupts per Second   Sets the maximum number of interrupts per second that the  adapter will generate     Network Address   allows the user to specify a MAC address that will override the default address  provided by the adapter     Packet Buffer Size   Sets the size in bytes of the buffers used by the receive descriptors and the  transmit descriptors     Receive Descriptors   Sets the number of descriptors to use in the adapter   s receiving ring     Transmit Descriptors   Sets the number of descriptors to use in the adapter   s transmit ring     To access the advanced properties for an adapter     Open a Network Connections window and find the connection for your network adapter   Right click on the name of the connection and select Properties from the 
178. lack Level Raw Tap 2 sets an additional amount of black level adjustment for the left half of the  sensor  The Black Level Raw Tap 2 value can be set in a range from 0 to 1023  The total black level  for the left half of the sensor will be the sum of the Black Level Raw All value plus the Black Level  Raw Tap 2 value     If the camera is set for a pixel data format that yields 8 bit effective pixel depth  Mono 8  YUV 4 2 2  Packed  YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  Packed   an increase of 64 in a black level setting will result in a positive  offset of 1 in the pixel values output from the camera  And a decrease of 64 in a black level setting  result in a negative offset of 1 in the pixel values output from the camera     If the camera is set for a pixel data format that yields an effective pixel depth of 12 bits per pixel   Mono 16  Mono 12 Packed   an increase of 4 in a black level setting will result in a positive offset  of 1 in the pixel values output from the camera  A decrease of 4 in a black level setting will result in  a negative offset of 1 in the pixel values output from the camera     For normal operation  we recommend that you set the value of Black Level Raw Tap 1 and Black  Level Raw Tap 2 to zero and that you simply use Black Level Raw All to set the black level  Typically   the tap black level settings are only used if you want to adjust the black level balance between the  left half and the right half of the sensor     Note     The sum of the Black Level Raw All setting plu
179. le  assume that the camera is mounted  on an arm mechanism and that the mechanism can move the camera to view different portions of  a product assembly  Typically  you do not want the camera to move during exposure  In this case   you can monitor the ExpAc signal to know when exposure is taking place and thus know when to  avoid moving the camera     Exposure  Exposure Exposure Exposure    Frame N Frame N 1 Frame N 2    2 3 5 US   ia    S 10   26 i 10 2 i   ExpAc 1s a  0 26 use  ma     Signal          Timing charts are not drawn to scale  Times stated are typical    2 3 5 us      Fig  37  Exposure Active Signal    Note   When you use the exposure active signal  be aware that there is a delay in the  rise and the fall of the signal in relation to the start and the end of exposure   See Figure 37 for details     By default  the ExpAc signal is assigned to physical output line 1 on the camera  However  the  assignment of the ExpAc signal to a physical output line can be changed     For more information about changing the assignment of camera output signals to physical output  lines  see Section 10 2 1 on page 139     For more information about the electrical characteristics of the camera   s output lines  see  Section 7 7 2 on page 73     98 Basler pilot    Image Acquisition Control    8 8 Acquisition Timing Chart    Figure 38 shows a timing chart for image acquisition and transmission  The chart assumes that  exposure is triggered by an ExTrig signal with rising edge activation
180. length    Center lines Center lines  of the housing    of the sensor of the thread                                                                                                                                                                           a 2 0 02  This is the sensor tilt tolerance  It applies to every point on the  photosensitive surface and is relative to the center of the die    Photosensitive il  surface of the 14    sensor EA  i WZ  J Zs O   0  17 57008  This tolerance is for the distance between the front of the  lens mount and the sensor   s photosensitive surface   Note that this tolerance and the sensor tilt tolerance  see  above  must be combined to obtain the total tolerance for  every point on the photosensitive surface    Maximum Sensor Tilt Angle  Degrees   Camera Tilt X Tilt Y Camera Tilt X Tilt Y  piA640 210gm gc 0 48 0 63 piA1900 32gm gc 0 16 0 29  piA1000 48 gm gc 0 31 0 31 piA2400 12gm gc 0 27 0 32  piA1600 35 gm gc 0 19 0 26 piA2400 17 gm gc 0 27 0 32                               Fig  12  Sensor Positioning Accuracy  in mm Unless Otherwise Noted     16 Basler pilot    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    1 5 2 90  Head Housing    The camera housing conforms to protection class IP30 provided the lens mount is covered by a lens  or by the cap that is shipped with the camera     1 5 2 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points    In pilot cameras with the 90   head housing the camera   s direction of view is at right angle to the  dire
181. les meres avandia a Milena e bas Saeed eed 65   7 4 2 Standard Power and I O Cable           0    cece ee 65   7 4 3 PLC Power and I O Cable       00    eee ee 67   To Camera  POWER  nS hie eae en ptat Os BIA tee Slide eb aeea ee eS ad 68  7 6 Ethernet GigE Device Information            0 00 0  eee 69  7 7 Input and Output Lines    2    tenets 70  LAAN  MPUCLINGS Saeed A eed Gee eee ae hed EO 70  7 7 1 1 Voltage Requirements          0 00 00  eee ee 70   7 7 1 2 Line Schematic            0 0    0c cee eee 72   Tie    OUIDULLINGS we eens one da rap a OLS Sede oa agen ee eS 73  7 7 2 1 Voltage Requirements            0 0 0  ee 73   L722  Line Schematic   drapire nee eile    Ge oka eee ee 73   7 7 3 Output Line Response Time             0 00 cece ee 75   8 Image Acquisition Control              00 sananen anann 77   8 1 Controlling Image Acquisition with Parameters Only  No Triggering                77  8 1 1 Switching Off Triggering            0    ee 77  8 1 2 Acquiring One Image at a Time    l una nauau uaaa 78  8 1 3 Acquiring Images Continuously  Free run                 00 0c 78  8 2 Controlling Image Acquisition with a Software Trigger        s    sasaa as anessan 80  8 2 1 Enabling the Software Trigger Feature            0 0    0c eee eee 80  8 2 2 Acquiring a Single Image by Applying One Software Trigger               81  8 2 3 Acquiring Images by Applying a Series of Software Triggers               82  8 3 Controlling Image Acquisition with a Hardware Trigger          
182. licated because you must consider several factors  when managing bandwidth  The procedure below outlines a structured approach to managing  bandwidth for several cameras     The objectives of the procedure are     To optimize network performance   To determine the bandwidth needed by each camera for image data transmission   To determine the bandwidth actually assigned to each camera for image data transmission     For each camera  to make sure that the actual bandwidth assigned for image data  transmission matches the bandwidth needed     To make sure that the total bandwidth assigned to all cameras does not exceed the network   s  bandwidth capacity     To make adjustments if the bandwidth capacity is exceeded     Step 1   Improve the Network Performance     If you use  as recommended  the Basler performance driver with an Intel PRO network adapter or  a compatible network adapter  the network parameters for the network adapter are automatically  optimized and need not be changed     If you use the Basler filter driver and have already set network parameters for your network adapter  during the installation of the Basler pylon software  continue with step two  Otherwise  open the  Network Connection Properties window for your network adapter and check the following network  parameters     If you use an Intel PRO network adapter  Make sure the Receive Descriptors parameter is set to  its maximum value and the Interrupt Moderation Rate parameter is set to Extreme     Also mak
183. ll   parameter name  in Section 11 12 2 on page 187    Replaced  Auto Exposure Time Abs  by the correct  Exposure Time Abs   parameter name in Section 11 12 3 on page 189    Added the auto function profile feature in Section 11 12 4 on page 191 and  adjusted Section 11 12 2 on page 187 and Section 11 12 3 on page 189  accordingly    Added the trigger delay feature in Section 11 15 on page 197    Added the acquisition status feature in Section 11 16 on page 198 and  added a reference in Section 8 2 3 on page 82    Added descriptions about resetting the frame counter and about relating  frame and trigger input counter in Section 11 17 3 on page 202    Corrected the maximum value for the frame counter in Section 11 17 3 on  page 202    Added the trigger input counter feature in Section 11 17 5 on page 206   Added the high gain and auto functions factory setups and the standard  factory setup  formerly the  default set   in Section 11 21 on page 220   Removed the statement that settings for frame transmission delay and inter  packet delay are not saved in the user sets in Section 11 21 on page 220   Added Section 12 1 on page 225 describing how to obtain an RMA number        232    Basler pilot       Feedback    Feedback    Your feedback will help us improve our documentation  Please click the link below to access an  online feedback form  Your input is greatly appreciated     http   www baslerweb com umfrage survey html    Basler pilot 233    Feedback    234 Basler pilot    Inde
184. lus the Gain Raw Tap 1 setting must be between 0    and 500  inclusive      The sum of the Gain Raw All setting plus the Gain Raw Tap 2 setting must be between 0    and 500  inclusive      150    Basler pilot    Features    If  for example  the piA640 210 gm gc the camera is set for a pixel data format that yields an  effective pixel depth of 12 bits per pixel  Mono 16  Mono 12 Packed     The Gain Raw All value can be set in a range from 0 to 400    The Gain Raw Tap 1 value can be set in a range from 0 to 400    The Gain Raw Tap 2 value can be set in a range from 0 to 400     The sum of the Gain Raw All setting plus the Gain Raw Tap 1 setting must be between 0  and 400  inclusive      The sum of the Gain Raw All setting plus the Gain Raw Tap 2 setting must be between 0  and 400  inclusive      For normal operation  we recommend that you set the value of Gain Raw Tap 1 and Gain Raw  Tap 2 to zero and that you simply use Gain Raw All to set the gain  Typically  the tap gains are only  used if you want to adjust the gain balance between the left half and the right half of the sensor     If you know the current settings for Gain Raw All  Gain Raw Tap 1  and Gain Raw Tap 2  you can  use the formulas below to calculate the dB of gain that will result from the settings     Gain on the Right Sensor Half     0 0359 x Gain Raw All Setting     0 0359 x Gain Raw Tap 1 Setting   Gain on the Left Sensor Half     0 0359 x Gain Raw All Setting     0 0359 x Gain Raw Tap 2 Setting     For exam
185. mage     To retrieve data from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC  you must  first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser included in the pylon API   Once the chunk parser has been used  you can retrieve the frame counter information by doing the  following     Read the value of the Chunk Frame Counter parameter     You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application  software by using the pylon API  You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data  The  following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode  enable the frame  counter chunk  run the parser  and retrieve the frame counter chunk data           make chunk mode active and enable Frame Counter chunk       Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue  true     Camera ChunkSelector SetValue  ChunkSelector_Framecounter       Camera ChunkEnable SetValue  true                retrieve date from the chunk   IChunkParser  amp ChunkParser    Camera CreateChunkParser      GrabResult Result    StreamGrabber RetrieveResult  Result       ChunkParser AttachBuffer   unsigned char   Result Buffer       202 Basler pilot    Features    Result GetPayloadSize               int64_t frameCounter   Camera ChunkFramecounter GetValue       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the par
186. n ata eek wee ee ee RN eee eee ee eee ee ee eA 30  Basler Network Drivers and Parameters             22000ee seen eeeee 31  4 1 The Basler Filter Driver            0 0 0000 eee 32  4 2 The Basler Performance Driver              000 00 eee eee 33  4 3 Transport Layer Parameters             0000  eee 41  Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth          43  5 1 Network Related Parameters in the Camera            0 0    cece eee eee 43  5 2 Managing Bandwidth When Multiple Cameras Share a Single Network Path        50  5 2 1 A Procedure for Managing Bandwidth            0 0    cee eee eee 51  Camera Functional Description             0  0 cece eee eee eee 57  6 1 OVEWVIEWL oeneias bh dae bhiadbeeo eee eenidad bate behdididwe kek ee nde wed 57    Basler pilot i    Table of Contents    7 Physical Interface  wi  oc ccc ee wk eee eee ee eee wee ee ee eee 61  7 1 General Description of the Connections            0 0 00  cee ee 61  7 2 Connector Pin Assignments and Numbering               00 02 c eee eee eee 62   7 2 1 12 pin Receptacle Pin Assignments              0000 cee eee ee 62   7 2 2 RJ 45 Jack Pin Assignments             0 000 cet ee 63   F233 SPIN  Numbering esere ees ee a tee reee a Pi eee eee ee eS eee PRES 63   TeS   Connector TYPES ace An anede nae oh Soe See eree Cea a adn ee aoe ee aa 64  7 3 1 8 pin RU 45 Jack 2 2    ee eee 64   7 3 2 12 pin Connector           0 0    eee 64   7 4 Cabling Requirements               0 0  c cece 65   431     Ethernet Cab
187. n page 29   For more information about the Trigger Ready signal  see Section 8 6 on page 96     For more information about the camera   s exposure time parameter  see Section 8 4 on page 91     Note      The explanations in Section 8 3 3 and Section 8 3 4 are intended to give you  a basic idea of how the use of a hardware trigger works  For a more complete  description  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide and to the sample  programs included in the Basler pylon Software Development Kit  SDK      90 Basler pilot    Image Acquisition Control    8 4 Exposure Time Parameters    Many of the camera   s image acquisition modes require you to specify an exposure time  There are  two ways to set exposure time  by setting  raw  values or by setting an  absolute value   The two  methods are described below  You can use whichever method you prefer to set the exposure time     The exposure time must not be set below a minimum specified value  The minimum exposure time  for each camera model is shown in Table 10     The maximum exposure time that can be set is also shown in Table 10                             Camera Model Minimum Allowed Exposure Time   Maximum Possible Exposure Time  piA640 210gm gc 28 us 10000000 us  piA1000 48gm gc 24 us 10000000 us  piA1600 35gm gc 50 us 10000000 us  piA1900 32gm gc 69 us 10000000 us  piA2400 12gm gc 45 us 10000000 us  piA2400 17gm gc 29 us 10000000 us                Table 10  Minimum Allowed Exposure Time and Maximum Possible Exposure Time
188. nction that you want to use and then set the size and the position of the Auto  Function AOI     By default  an Auto Function AOI is set to the full resolution of the camera   s sensor  You can change  the size and the position of an Auto Function AOI by changing the value of the Auto Function AOIl   s  X Offset  Y Offset  Width  and Height parameters   The value of the X Offset parameter determines the starting column for the Auto Function AOI   The value of the Y Offset parameter determines the starting line for the Auto Function AOI   The value of the Width parameter determines the width of the Auto Function AOI   The value of the Height parameter determines the height of the Auto Function AOI     When you are setting an Auto Function AOI  you must follow these guidelines   The sum of the X Offset setting plus the Width setting must not exceed the width of the  camera   s sensor  For example  on the piA640 21gm0  the sum of the X Offset setting plus the  Width setting must not exceed 648   The sum of the Y Offset setting plus the Height setting must not exceed the height of the  camera   s sensor  For example  on the piA640 210gm  the sum of the Y Offset setting plus the  Height setting must not exceed 488     The X Offset  Y Offset  Width  and Height parameters can be set in increments of 1        and Height parameters for an Auto Function AOI in increments of 2 to make the  Auto Function AOI match the Bayer filter pattern of the sensor  For example  you  should set the X
189. ndwidth Assigned values is greater than 125 MByte s for a Give network or 12 5  M Byte s for a 100 Bit s network  the cameras need more bandwidth than is available and you must    54 Basler pilot    Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth    make adjustments  In essence  you must lower the data bandwidth needed by one or more of the  cameras and then adjust the data bandwidths assigned so that they reflect the lower bandwidth  needs     You can lower the data bandwidth needed by a camera either by lowering its frame rate or by  decreasing the size of the area of interest  AOI   Once you have adjusted the frame rates and or  AOI settings on the cameras  you should repeat steps 2 through 6     For more information about the camera   s maximum allowed frame transmission rate  see  Section 8 9 on page 102     For more information about the AOI  see Section 11 6 on page 163     Basler pilot 55    Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth    56    Basler pilot    Camera Functional Description    6 Camera Functional  Description    This section provides an overview of the camera   s functionality from a system perspective  The  overview will aid your understanding when you read the more detailed information included in the  next chapters of the user   s manual     6 1 Overview    Each camera provides features such as a full frame shutter and electronic exposure time control     Exposure start  exposure time  and charge readout can be controlled by par
190. nes of a received frame  will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer GB 16 output  Note  that the data is placed in the image buffer in little endian format     The following standards are used in the tables    Po   the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a line  Ph   the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a line  Bg   the first byte of data for a line    Bm   the last byte of data for a line                                                                                              Even Lines Odd Lines   Byte Data Byte Data   Bo Low byte of green value for Po Bo Low byte of red value for Po  B  High byte of green value for Po B  High byte of red value for Po  Bo Low byte of blue value for P  Bo Low byte of green value for P   B3 High byte of blue value for P4 Bs High byte of green value for P   B4 Low byte of green value for Po B4 Low byte of red value for Po  Bs High byte of green value for Po Bs High byte of red value for P gt   Be Low byte of blue value for P3 Be Low byte of green value for P3  B7 High byte of blue value for P3 B7 High byte of green value for P3  Bm 7 Low byte of green value for Pr 3 Bm 7 Low byte of red value for P  3  Bm 6 High byte of green value for Ph 3 Bm 6 High byte of red value for Ph 3                            Basler pilot 121    Pixel Data Formats                                           Bm 5 Low byte of blue value for Ph 2 Bm 5 Low byte of green value for Ph 2  Bm 4 High byte of blue value for
191. ng the camera at it   s maximum  resolution  your exposure time will not normally be the most restrictive factor on the frame rate   However  if you are using long exposure times or small areas of interest  it is quite possible to    102 Basler pilot    Image Acquisition Control    find that your exposure time is the most restrictive factor on the frame rate  In this case  you  should lower your exposure time   You may need to compensate for a lower exposure time by  using a brighter light source or increasing the opening of your lens aperture      The frame transmission time will not normally be a restricting factor  But if you are using  multiple cameras and you have set a small packet size or a large inter packet delay  you may  find that the transmission time is restricting the maximum allowed rate  In this case  you could  increase the packet size or decrease the inter packet delay  If you are using several cameras  connected to the host PC via a network switch  you could also use a multiport network adapter  in the PC instead of a switch  This would allow you to increase the Ethernet bandwidth  assigned to the camera and thus decrease the transmission time     For more information about AOI settings  see Section 11 6 on page 163     For more information on the settings that determine the bandwidth assigned to the camera  see  Section 5 2 on page 50     Formula 1   Calculates the maximum frame rate based on the sensor readout time     1    Max  Frames s    AOI Height x C
192. nren seniii ania 2 4 6  pixel transmission sequence              0  135  PLC power and I O cable                   65  67  voltage requirement               006 68  70  pr  caution Sihi a paia 25  programmable exposure mode  with an external trigger signal              85  protection class    ss    neeesser 14  17  PYIOMAP ei e ee ies 30  pylon Viewer  assssssssssrsesrrsrserreserrnsrernene 29  238    R  read timeout parameter                 eeee 41  receive descriptors    ecceeeee 51  receive WINKOW            ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 33  receive window size parameter                 34  reduced resolution seee 168  resend request batching parameter          35  resend request response timeout parameter  EE ET EN 37  resend request threshold parameter         35  resend timeout parameter            eee 37  response to light cece 168  resulting frame rate parameter                  48  return material authorization                 225  reverse X  explained ausit etas 170  RMA numbee              2   eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 225  S  saving parameter sets               26 220  221  sensor  Ar  hitectUr Esnia iiaia ankan inienn 58  optical size    neee 2 4 6  DIXGI SIZE a eaa eiet ae 2 4 6  position ACCUIACY              cee 16 19  SIZC A PAE E E EA 2 4 6  VEn ariin ities 2 4 6  sensor height parameter    218  sensor width parameter    218  serial NUMDEL              cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 26  sets of parameters  Saving          c ee 221  software development kit    30 
193. nsor  But if binning is enabled  these  parameters are set in terms of  virtual  columns and lines  For more  information  see Section 11 6 on page 163     164 Basler pilot    Features    You can set the X Offset  Y Offset  Width  and Height parameter values from within your application  software by using the pylon API  The following code snippets illustrate using the API to get the  maximum allowed settings and the increments for the Width and Height parameters  They also  illustrate setting the X Offset  Y Offset  Width  and Height parameter values    int64_t widthMax   Camera Width GetMax      int64_t widhInc   Camera Width GetInc     Camera Width SetValue  200     Camera OffsetX SetValue  100       int64_t heightMax   Camera Height GetMax           int64_t heightInc   Camera Height GetInc  j   Camera Height SetValue  200          Camera OffsetY SetValue  100       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     11 6 1 Changing AOI Parameters  On the Fly     Making AOI parameter changes    on the fly    means making the parameter changes while the  camera is capturing images continuously  On the fly changes are only allowed for the parameters  that determine the position of the AOI  i e   the X Offset and Y Offset parameters  Changes to the 
194. ntly     For more information about using the Trigger Ready signal  see Section 8 6 on page 96     For more detailed guidelines about using an external trigger signal with the trigger width exposure  mode and overlapped exposure  refer to the application notes called  Using a Specific External  Trigger Signal with Overlapped Exposure     AW000565xx000   The application notes are available  in the downloads section of the Basler website  www baslerweb com     Basler pilot 95    Image Acquisition Control    8 6 Trigger Ready Signal    As described in the previous section  the cameras can operate in an    overlapped    acquisition  fashion  When the camera is operated in this manner  it is especially important that     the exposure time of a new image acquisition not start until exposure of the previously  acquired image is complete  and    the exposure time of a new image acquisition not end until readout of the previously acquired  image is complete     The camera supplies a    Trigger Ready     TrigRdy  output signal you can use to ensure that these  conditions are met when you are using a hardware trigger signal to trigger image acquisition  When  you are acquiring images  the camera automatically calculates the earliest moment that it is safe to  trigger each new acquisition  The trigger ready signal will go high when it is safe to trigger an  acquisition  will go low when the acquisition has started  and will go high again when it is safe to  trigger the next acquisition  
195. nto a user set in the camera   s non volatile memory is a three step  process     Make changes to the camera   s settings until the camera is operating in a manner that you  would like to save    Set the User Set Selector to User Set 1  User Set 2  or User Set 3    Execute a User Set Save command to save the active set to the selected user set     Saving an active set to a user set in the camera   s non volatile memory will overwrite any parameters  that were previously saved in that user set     You can set the User Set Selector and execute the User Set Save command from within your  application software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to  set the selector and execute the command     Camera UserSetSelector SetValue  UserSetSelector_UserSetl             Camera UserSetSave Execute           For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide  and API Reference     Basler pilot 221    Features    You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     11 21 2Selecting a Factory Setup as the  Default Set    When the camera is delivered  the Standard Factory Setup will be selected as the default  configuration set  You can  however  select any one of the three factory setups to serve as the  default set     To select which factory setup to serve as the default set     Set the Default Set
196. o Triggering     You can configure the camera so that image acquisition will be controlled by simply setting the value  of several parameters via the camera   s API  When the camera is configured to acquire images  based on parameter values only  a software trigger or an external hardware trigger  ExTrig  signal  is not required     You can set the camera so that it will acquire images one at a time or so that it will acquire images  continuously     8 1 1 Switching Off Triggering    If you want to control image acquisition based on parameter settings alone  you must make sure  that the camera   s acquisition start trigger is set to off  Setting the acquisition start trigger is a two  step process     First use the camera   s Trigger Selector parameter to select the Acquisition Start trigger   Second use the camera   s Trigger Mode parameter to set the selected trigger to Off     You can set the Trigger Selector and the Trigger Mode parameter value from within your application  software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the  selector and the parameter value        Camera TriggerSelector SetValue  TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart          Camera  TriggerMode SetValue  TriggerMode_Off          For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the 
197. o output line 2  Timer  3 can only be assigned to output line 3  Timer 4 can only be assigned to output line 4     If you require the timer signal to be high when the timer is triggered and to go low when the delay  expires  simply set the output line to invert     10 2 4 1 Setting the Trigger Source for a Timer    To set the trigger source for a timer     Use the Timer Selector to select timer 1 or timer 2     Set the value of the Timer Trigger Source parameter to exposure active  This will set the  selected timer to use the start of exposure to begin the timer     You can set the Trigger Selector and the Timer Trigger Source parameter value from within your  application software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to  set the selector and the parameter value        Camera TimerSelector SetValue  TimerSelector_Timerl                _ExposureStart       Camera  TimerTriggerSource SetValue  TimerTriggerSourc       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     142 Basler pilot    I O Control    10 2 4 2 Setting a Timer Delay Time    There are two ways to set the delay time for a timer  by setting  raw  values or by setting an   absolute value   You can use whichever method you prefer to set the delay time 
198. o which the mechanical stress tests  apply in Section 1 5 4 on page 21   Modified the voltage information in Section 1 9 on page 25   Removed voltage information from Table 5 in Section 7 2 1 on page 62   Added Section 7 4 3 on page 67 and notes in Section 7 4 2 on page 65   introducing the PLC cable   Included detailed voltage information in Section 7 5 on page 68   Section 7 7 1 1 on page 70  and Section 7 7 2 1 on page 73   Modified the absolute maximum rating to  30 0 VDC in Section 7 7 1 2 on  page 72 and Section 7 7 2 2 on page 73   Added a note relating to the debouncer in Section 8 8 on page 99   Renamed Section 11 on page 149 the Features section and included the  contents of the former Chunk Features section   Corrected the minimum value for the white balance ratio in Section 11 3 on  page 155   Added Section 11 9 on page 173 introducing the averaging feature   Corrected the name of the Gamma parameter in Section 11 11 on  page 179   The Gamma parameter was incorrectly referred to as the  Gamma Raw parameter    Included the  Auto Functions  section on page 180 and added related  information in other parts of the manual   Extended the description of the debouncer in Section 11 14 on page 195   Minor modifications and corrections throughout the manual   AW00015114000   22 Aug 2008   Updated contact addresses and phone numbers   Official release of the averaging feature and of the auto functions   AW00015115000   30 Sep 2008   Added information for the new piA2400 17gm
199. on  each time an image is acquired  the camera completes the entire exposure readout  process before acquisition of the next image is started  This situation is illustrated in Figure 34        Image Acquisition N Image Acquisition N 1 Image Acquisition N 2  Exposure Readout Exposure Readout Exposure Readout                Time    Fig  34  Non overlapped Exposure    While operating in a non overlapped fashion is perfectly normal and is appropriate for many  situations  it is not the most efficient way to operate the camera in terms of acquisition frame rate   On this camera  however  it is allowable to begin exposing a new image while a previously acquired  image is being read out  This situation is illustrated in Figure 35 and is known as operating the  camera with    overlapped    exposure     As you can see  running the camera with readout and exposure overlapped can allow higher  acquisition frame rates because the camera is performing two processes at once        Image Acquisition N  Exposure Readout                   Image Acquisition N 1  Exposure Readout                      Image Acquisition N 2  Exposure Readout                Image Acquisition N 3  Exposure Readout                Time    Fig  35  Overlapped Exposure    94 Basler pilot    Image Acquisition Control    Determining whether your camera is operating with overlapped or non overlapped exposures is not  a matter of issuing a command or switching a setting on or off  Rather the way that you operate the  camer
200. onal short term delay in event message transmission  the queue can buffer several  events and can send them within a single event message as soon as transmission time is available     Basler pilot 213    Features    However if you are operating the camera at high frame rates with a small AOI  the camera may be  able to generate and queue events faster than they can be transmitted and acknowledged  In this  case    1  The queue will fill and events will be dropped    2  An event overrun will occur     3  Assuming that you have event overrun reporting enabled  the camera will generate an  event  overrun event  and place it in the queue     4  As soon as transmission time is available  an event message containing the event overrun  event will be transmitted to the PC     The event overrun event is simply a warning that events are being dropped  The notification  contains no specific information about how many or which events have been dropped     Setting Your System for Event Reporting    To use event reporting  two conditions must be met     Event reporting must be enabled in the camera  A pylon  event grabber  must be created within your application  assuming that you are using  the pylon API    The main purpose of the pylon event grabber is to receive incoming event messages     Another purpose of the pylon event grabber is to handle event message acknowledgement  The  values for the event message timeout and the event message retry count are set via the event  grabber     An
201. one of the first line in each image transmitted  will be blue and green respectively  And for the second line transmitted  pixel zero and pixel one will  be green and red respectively  Since the pattern of the Bayer filter is fixed  you can use this  information to determine the color of all of the other pixels in the image     Because the size and position of the area of interest on color cameras must be adjusted in  increments of 2  the color filter alignment will remain the same regardless of the camera   s area of  interest  AOI  settings     The Pixel Color Filter parameter indicates the current alignment of the camera   s Bayer filter to the  pixels in the images captured by a color camera  You can tell how the current AOI is aligned to the  Bayer filter by reading the value of the Pixel Color Filter parameter     For more information about the camera   s AOI feature  see Section 11 6 on page 163     116 Basler pilot    Pixel Data Formats    9 3 2 Bayer GB 8 Format  Equivalent to DCAM Raw 8     When a color camera is set for the Bayer GB 8 pixel data format  it outputs 8 bits of data per pixel  and the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way  So  for each pixel covered with a red  lens  you get 8 bits of red data  For each pixel covered with a green lens  you get 8 bits of green  data  And for each pixel covered with a blue lens  you get 8 bits of blue data   This type of pixel data  is sometimes referred to as  raw  output      The  GB  in the name Bayer
202. ot using shift by 4  If you do  nonetheless  all bits output from the camera will  automatically be set to 1  Therefore  you should only use the shift by 4 setting when your pixel  readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 16     Shifted Four Times       gt         M    S  iz    Basler pilot 159    Features    11 4 3 Precautions When Using Digital Shift    There are several checks and precautions that you must follow before using the digital shift feature   The checks and precautions differ depending on whether the camera will be set for a 12 bit pixel  format or for an 8 bit pixel format in your application   If you will be using a 12 bit pixel format  make this check   Use the pylon Viewer or the pylon API to set the camera for a 12 bit pixel format and no digital shift   Check the output of the camera under your normal lighting conditions and note the readings for the  brightest pixels    If any of the readings are above 2048  do not use digital shift    If all of the readings are below 2048  you can safely use the shift by 1 setting    If all of the readings are below 1024  you can safely use the shift by 1 or 2 settings    If all of the readings are below 512  you can safely use the shift by 1  2  or 3 settings    If all of the readings are below 256  you can safely use the shift by 1  2  3  or 4 settings     If you will be using an 8 bit format  make this check   Use the pylon Viewer or the pylon API to set the camera
203. our will be red  etc     The tables below describe how the data for the even lines and for the odd lines of a received frame  will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer BG 8 output     The following standards are used in the tables   Po   the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a line    P    the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a line    Bg   the first byte of data for a line    Bm   the last byte of data for a line                                                                                                          Even Lines Odd Lines   Byte Data Byte Data   Bo Blue value for Po Bo Green value for Po  B  Green value for P4 B4 Red value for P4   Bo Blue value for Po Bo Green value for Po  B3 Green value for P3 Bg Red value for P3   By Blue value for P4 By Green value for P4  Bs Green value for P5 Bs Red value for Ps   2 e 2 e   2 e 2 e   2 e 2 e   Bm 5 Blue value for Ph 5 Bm 5 Green value for Ph 5  Bm 4 Green value for Ph 4 Bm 4 Red value for P  4  Bm 3 Blue value for P   3 Bn 3 Green value for P  3  Bm 2 Green value for Ph 2 Bm 2 Red value for P    gt   Bm 1 Blue value for P  4 Bm 1 Green value for Ph 14  Bm Green value for Ph Bm Red value for Ph                            Basler pilot 119    Pixel Data Formats    With the camera set for Bayer BG 8  the pixel data output is 8 bit data of the    unsigned char    type   The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in    the
204. parameter values     78 Basler pilot       set  Camera     set  Camera  Camera    double    Image Acquisition Control    camera in continous mode     AcquisitionMode SetValue  AcquisitionMode_Continuous       a frame rate and getting the resulting frame rate           AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue  true      AcquisitionFrameRateAbs SetValue  20 5             resultingFrameRate   Camera ResultingFrameRateAbs GetValue       You can also execute the Acquisition Start and Stop commands by using the API     For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     For more information about the camera   s exposure time parameter  see Section 8 4 on page 91     For more information about determining the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate  see  Section 8 9 on page 102     Basler pilot    Note    The explanations in Section 8 1 2 and Section 8 1 3 are intended to give you  a basic idea of how parameters alone can be used to control image  acquisition  For a more complete description  refer to the Basler pylon  Programmer   s Guide and to the sample programs included in the Basler pylon  Software Development Kit  SDK      79    Image Acquisition Control    8 2 Controlling Image Acquisition  with a Software Trigger    You can configure the camera so that
205. pilot    Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth     6  You trigger image acquisition and during this time period  the camera acquires and transmits  a frame  The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period and 1  resend is needed  The 1 resend needed is taken from the resends available via the  bandwidth reserve  The other 4 resends available via the bandwidth reserve are not needed   so they are added to the accumulator pool and they bring the pool up to 4      7  During this time period  you do not trigger image acquisition  You delay triggering acquisition  for the period of time that would normally be needed to acquire and transmit a single image   The current camera settings would allow 5 resends to occur during this period of time  But  since no data is transmitted  no resends are required  The 5 resends that could have  occurred are added to the accumulator pool and they bring the pool up to 9      8  You trigger image acquisition and during this time period  the camera acquires and transmits  a frame  The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period  but no  resends are needed  The 5 resends available via the bandwidth reserve are not needed  so  they are added to the accumulator pool and they bring the pool up to 14      9  You trigger image acquisition and during this time period  the camera acquires and transmits  a frame  The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time pe
206. ple  assume that you have set the Gain Raw All to 450  the Gain Raw Tap 1 to 0  and the  Gain Raw Tap 2 to 0  Then     Gain on the Right Sensor Half     0 0359 x 450     0 0359 x 0   Gain on the Right Sensor Half   16 2 dB    Gain on the Left Sensor Half     0 0359 x 450     0 0359 x 0   Gain on the Left Sensor Half   16 2 dB    Basler pilot 151    Features    Setting the Gain       Note   Gain can not only be manually set  see below   but can also be automatically  adjusted  The Gain Auto function is the  automatic  counterpart of the gain feature  and carries out a Gain Raw All adjustment automatically     For more information about auto fuctions  see Section 11 12 1 on page 180     For more information about the Gain Auto function  see Section 11 12 2 on  page 187                 To set the Gain Raw All parameter value    Set the Gain Selector to All    Set the Gain Raw parameter to your desired value   To set the Gain Raw Tap 1 parameter value    Set the Gain Selector to Tap 1    Set the Gain Raw parameter to your desired value   To set the Gain Raw Tap 2 parameter value     Set the Gain Selector to Tap 2   Set the Gain Raw parameter to your desired value     You can set the Gain Selector and the Gain Raw parameter values from within your application  software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the  selector and the parameter value        Set Gain Raw All  Camera GainSelector SetValue  GainSelector_All          Camera GainR
207. provide the following general guidelines   In all cases  you should monitor the temperature of the camera housing and make sure that the  temperature does not exceed 50   C  Keep in mind that the camera will gradually become  warmer during the first 1 5 hours of operation  After 1 5 hours  the housing temperature should  stabilize and no longer increase   If your camera is mounted on a substantial metal component in your system  this may provide  sufficient heat dissipation   The use of a fan to provide air flow over the camera is an extremely efficient method of heat  dissipation  The use of a fan provides the best heat dissipation     24 Basler pilot    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    1 9 Precautions    A    CAUTION       Avoid Dust on the Sensor    The camera is shipped with a cap on the lens mount  To avoid collecting dust  on the camera   s IR cut filter  color cameras  or sensor  mono cameras   make  sure that you always put the cap in place when there is no lens mounted on  the camera     Lens Thread Length is Limited    Color models of the camera with a C mount lens adapter are equipped with an  IR cut filter mounted inside of the adapter  The location of this filter limits the  length of the threads on any lens you use with the camera  If a lens with a very  long thread length is used  the IR cut filter will be damaged or destroyed and  the camera will no longer operate     For more specific information about the lens thread length  see Section 1 5 3
208. pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     92 Basler pilot    Image Acquisition Control    8 4 2 Setting the Exposure Time Using   Absolute  Settings    You can also set the exposure time by using an  absolute  value  This is accomplished by setting  the Exposure Time Abs parameter  The units for setting this parameter are us and the value can be  set in increments of 1 us     When you use the Exposure Time Abs parameter to set the exposure time  the camera  accomplishes the setting change by automatically changing the Exposure Time Raw parameter to  achieve the value specified by your Exposure Time Abs setting  This leads to a limitation that you  must keep in mind if you use Exposure Time Abs parameter to set the exposure time  That is  you  must set the Exposure Time Abs parameter to a value that is equivalent to a setting you could  achieve by using the Exposure Time Raw parameter with the current Exposure Time Base  parameter  For example  if the time base was currently set to 62 us  you could use the Exposure  Time Base Abs parameter to set the exposure to 62 us  124 us  186 us  etc     Note that if you set the Exposure Time Abs parameter to a value that you could not achieve by using  the Exposure Time Raw and Exposure Time Base parameters  the camera will automatically  c
209. pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     Basler pilot 77    Image Acquisition Control    8 1 2 Acquiring One Image at a Time    In    single frame    operation  the camera acquires and transmits a single image  To select single  frame operation  the camera   s Acquisition Mode parameter must be set to Single Frame     To begin image acquisition  execute an Acquisition Start command  Exposure time is determined  by the value of the camera   s exposure time parameter     When using the single frame method to acquire images  you must not begin acquiring a new image  until the previously captured image has been completely transmitted to the host PC     You can set the Acquisition Mode parameter value from within your application software by using   the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value   Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue  AcquisitionMode_SingleFrame  j    You can also execute the Acquisition Start command by using the API     For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters   For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     For more information about the camera   s exposure time parameter  see Section 8 4 on page 91     8 1 3 Acquiring Images Continuously  Free run     In    continuous frame    operation  the camera continuously acquires and t
210. pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     154 Basler pilot    Features    11 3 White Balance  on Color Models     White balance capability has been implemented on color models of the camera  White balancing  can be used to adjust the color balance of the images transmitted from the camera     Setting the White Balance       Note   White balance can not only be manually set  see below   but can also be  automatically adjusted  The Balance White Auto function is the  automatic   counterpart of the white balance feature and adjusts the white balance  automatically   For more information about auto fuctions  see Section 11 12 1 on page 180     For more information about the Balance White Auto function  see Section 11 12 5  on page 192                 With the white balancing scheme used on these cameras  the red intensity  green intensity  and blue  intensity can each be adjusted  For each color  a Balance Ratio parameter is used to set the  intensity of the color  If the Balance Ratio parameter for a color is set to a value of 1  the intensity  of the color will be unaffected by the white balance mechanism  If the ratio is set to a value lower  than 1  the intensity of the color will be reduced  If the ratio is set to a value greater than 1  the  intensity of the color will be increased  The increase or decrease in intensity is proportional  For  example  if the balance ratio for a color 
211. quence below  The  sequence assumes that you have set the camera for rising edge triggering and for the timed  exposure mode     1  Access the camera   s API and set the exposure time parameters for your desired exposure  time   2  Set the value of the camera   s Acquisition Mode parameter to Continuous     3  Execute an Acquisition Start command  This prepares the camera to react to the trigger  signals     4  Check the state of the camera   s Trigger Ready signal   a  If the TrigRdy signal is high  you can transition the ExTrig signal when desired   b  If the TrigRdy signal is low  wait until TrigRdy goes high and then transition the ExTrig signal   when desired    5  When the ExTrig signal transitions from low to high  image acquisition will start  Exposure will  continue for the length of time you specified in step 1    6  At the end of the specified exposure time  readout and transmission of the acquired image will  take place    7  Repeat steps 4 and 5 each time you want to start another image acquisition     8  Execute an Acquisition Stop command  The camera will no longer react to hardware triggers     If you are acquiring images using a series of hardware trigger transitions  you must avoid acquiring  images at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed with the current camera settings  You can  avoid triggering image acquistion at too high a rate by using the trigger ready signal as described  above     You should also be aware that if the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs pa
212. r Size gm  2456 x 2058    H x V pixels  gc  2454 x 2056   Sensor Type Sony ICX625ALA AQA  Progressive scan CCD   Optical Size 2 3    Pixel Size 3 45 um x 3 45 um       Max  Frame Rate   at full resolution     12 fps 17 fps          Mono Color    All models available in mono or color       Data Output Type    Fast Ethernet  100 Mbit s  or Gigabit Ethernet  1000 Mbit s        Pixel Data Formats    Mono Models  Mono 8  equivalent to DCAM Mono 8    Mono 16  equivalent to DCAM Mono 16    Mono 12 Packed   YUV 4 2 2 Packed  equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2   YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  Packed   Mono 8  equivalent to DCAM Mono 8    Bayer BG 8  equivalent to DCAM Raw 8    Bayer BG 16  equivalent to DCAM Raw 16    Bayer BG 12 Packed   YUV 4 2 2 Packed  equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2   YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  Packed    Color Models        ADC Bit Depth    12 bits       Synchronization    Via external trigger signal or via software       Exposure Control    Programmable via the camera API       Camera Power  Requirements     12 to  24 VDC   min   11 3 VDC  absolute max   30 0 VDC      lt  1  ripple       5 4 W   12 VDC 5 9 W   12 VDC          I O Ports    2 opto isolated input ports and 4 opto isolated output ports          Lens Adapter       C mount          Basler pilot    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions       Specification    piA2400 12gm gc       piA2400 17gm gc       Size  L x W x H    standard housing      90   head housing     86 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm  without lens adapter or connectors   98
213. ra power ground through two  separate wires between the power supply and the camera as shown in the  figure     66 Basler pilot    Physical Interface    7 4 3 PLC Power and I O Cable    As with the standard power and I O cable described in the previous section  the PLC power and  I O cable is a single cable that connects power to the camera and connects to the camera   s I O  lines     The PLC power and I O cable adjusts the voltage levels of PLC devices to the voltage levels  required by the camera  and it protects the camera against negative voltage and reverse polarity     Close proximity to strong magnetic fields should be avoided     Note     We recommend using a PLC power and I O cable if the camera is connected  to a PLC device     You can use a PLC power and I O cable when the camera is not connected to  a PLC device  if power for the I O input is supplied with 24 VDC     Basler offers PLC power and I O cables with 3 m and 10 m lengths  Each cable is terminated with  a 12 pin Hirose plug  HR10A 10P 12S  on the end that connects to the camera  The other end is  unterminated  Contact your Basler sales representative to order the cables     Basler pilot 67    Physical Interface    7 5 Camera Power    Camera power must be supplied to the camera   s 12 pin connector via the standard power and I O  cable or via the PLC power and I O cable  Power consumption is as shown in the specification  tables in Section 1 of this manual     CAUTION    CAUTION    Voltage Outside of Spec
214. ra when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 0     The numbers at locations 1 through 7 are not used     The number at location 8 in the table represents the 12 bit value that will be transmitted out of  the camera when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 8     The numbers at locations 9 through 15 are not used     The number at location 16 in the table represents the 12 bit value that will be transmitted out of  the camera when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 16     The numbers at locations 17 through 23 are not used     The number at location 24 in the table represents the 12 bit value that will be transmitted out of  the camera when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 24     And so on     As you can see  the table does not include a defined 12 bit output value for every pixel value that  the sensor can report  So what does the camera do when the sensor reports a pixel value that is  between two values that have a defined 12 bit output  In this case  the camera performs a straight  line interpolation to determine the value that it should transmit  For example  assume that the  sensor reports a pixel value of 12  In this case  the camera would perform a straight line  interpolation between the values at location 8 and location 16 in the table  The result of the  interpolation would be reported out of the camera as the 12 bit output     Another thing to keep in mind about the table is that location 4088 is the last location that 
215. rameter  For example  if the Bandwidth Assigned parameter indicates that  30 MByte s have been assigned to the camera and the Bandwidth Reserve parameter is set to 5    then the bandwidth reserve will be 1 5 MByte s     Bandwidth Reserve Accumulation  read write     A software device called the bandwidth reserve accumulator is designed to handle unusual  situations such as a sudden EMI burst that interrupts an image transmission  If this happens  a  larger than normal number of packet resends may be needed to properly transmit a complete  image  The accumulator is basically an extra pool of resends that the camera can use in unusual  situations     The Bandwidth Reserve Accumulation parameter is a multiplier used to set the maximum number  of resends that can be held in the  accumulator pool   For example  assume that the current  bandwidth reserve setting for your camera is 5  and that this reserve is large enough to allow up  to 5 packet resends during a frame period  Also assume that the Bandwidth Reserve Accumulation  parameter is set to 3  With these settings  the accumulator pool can hold a maximum of 15 resends   i e   the multiplier times the maximum number of resends that could be transmitted in a frame  period   Note that with these settings  15 will also be the starting number of resends within the  accumulator pool     The chart on the next page and the numbered text below it show an example of how the  accumulator would work with these settings  The chart and the
216. rameter is enabled  it will  influence the rate at which images can be acquired     If the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter is set to a value less than the maximum allowed   you can trigger acquisition at any rate up to the set value     If the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter is set to a value greater than the maximum  allowed  you can trigger acquisition at any rate up to the maximum allowed image acquisition  rate with the current camera settings     Basler pilot 89    Image Acquisition Control    You can set the exposure time and the Acquisition Mode parameter values from within your  application software by using the pylon API  You can also execute the Acquisition Start and Stop  commands  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and  execute the commands     Camera TriggerSelector SetValue  TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart                Camera ExposureMode SetValue  ExposureMode_Timed             Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue  3000          Camera TriggerActivation SetValue  TriggerActivation_RisingEdge       Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue  AcquisitionMode_Continuous  j        Camera AcquisitionStart Execute           Camera AcquisitionStop Execute        For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters   For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 o
217. ransmits images  To select  continuous frame operation  the camera   s Acquisition Mode parameter must be set to Continuous    Note that operating the camera in continuous frame mode without the use of a trigger is also  commonly called  free run       To begin acquiring images  issue an Acquisition Start command  The exposure time for each image  is determined by the value of the camera   s exposure time parameter  Acquisition start for the  second and subsequent images is automatically controlled by the camera  Image acquisition and  transmission will stop when you execute an Acquisition Stop command     When the camera is operating in continuous frame mode without triggering  the acquisition frame  rate is determined by the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter     If the parameter is enabled and set to a value less than the maximum allowed acquisition  frame rate  the camera will acquire images at rate specified by the parameter setting    If the parameter is disabled or is set to a value greater than the maximum allowed acquisition  frame rate  the camera will acquire images at the maximum allowed     Note that before you can use the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter to control the frame rate   the parameter must be enabled     You can set the Acquisition Mode parameter value and you can enable and set the Acquisition  Frame Rate Abs parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API  The  following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the 
218. red   Use the LUT Enable parameter to enable the table     You can set the LUT Selector  the LUT Index parameter and the LUT Value parameter from within  your application software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the  API to set the selector and the parameter values        Select the lookup table  Camera LUTSelector SetValue  LUTSelector_Luminance                Write a lookup table to the device        The following lookup table causes an inversion of the sensor values       bright   gt  dark  dark   gt  bright      for   int i   0  i  lt  4096  i    8         Camera LUTIndex SetValue  i          Camera LUTValue SetValue  4095   i           Enable the lookup table  Camera LUTEnable SetValue  true                For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     178 Basler pilot    Features    11 11 Gamma    The gamma correction feature lets you modify the brightness of the pixel values output by the  camera   s sensor to account for a non linearity in the human perception of brightness  To accomplish  the correction  a gamma correction factor  y  is applied to the brightness value  Y  of each pixel  according to the following formula     Y Yy  uncorrected  Y corrected     Y   xY    max    max    The formula use
219. reen light   This combination  mimics the human eye   s sensitivity to color      BACAR CAA eA eA eA eA iC Senen  CARA ARA ERE ARA ARA ARE ARE ER  HEARBREHEEHEAEEaeE  ARA ARE ARA ARE ARA ARE ARE ER  BACAR CAA Eei eA eA eA RC  CARA ARA ERE ERA ARE ARE ARE ER  BACAR AeA eA AeA eA eR RC  CARA ARA ARE ARA ARE ARE ARE ER  HEABREHEHEAEEaeEEaG  CARA ARA ERE ARA ARE ARE ARE ER  HEAEREEEHEAEEeEHaG  CARA ARA ERE ERA ARE ARE ARE ER  BACHA AeA eA AeA eA eR RC  CARA ARA ERE ARA ARE ARE ARE ER  BACHA AeA eA AeA eA eR RC  CARA ARA ERE ARA ARE ARE ARE ER    Pixels       Fig  39  Bayer Filter Pattern    Basler pilot 115    Pixel Data Formats    9 3 1 1 Color Filter Alignment    The alignment of the Bayer filter to the pixels in the images acquired by color cameras depends on  the camera model  Table 14 shows the filter alignment for each available camera model                             Color Camera Model Filter Alignment  piA640 210 GB  piA1000 48 GB  piA1600 35 GB  piA1900 32 GB  piA2400 12 BG  piA2400 17 BG             Table 14  Bayer Filter to Sensor Alignment    Bayer GB alignment means that pixel zero and pixel one of the first line in each image transmitted  will be green and blue respectively  And for the second line transmitted  pixel zero and pixel one will  be red and green respectively  Since the pattern of the Bayer filter is fixed  you can use this  information to determine the color of all of the other pixels in the image     Bayer BG alignment means that pixel zero and pixel 
220. rigger Delay    The trigger delay feature lets you specify a delay  in microseconds  that will be applied between the  receipt of a hardware trigger and it becoming effective     The trigger delay may be specified in the range from 0 to 10000000  us  equivalent to 10 s   When  the delay is set to 0 us  no delay will be applied     The trigger delay will not operate when the camera is triggered by your application software and  when the camera operates in continuous frame mode  free run      You can set the Trigger Delay Abs parameter value from within your application software by using  the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values        Trigger delay  double TriggerDelay_us   1000 0    1000us    1ms    0 0013        Camera  TriggerDelayAbs SetValue  TriggerDelay_us       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     Basler pilot 197    Features    11 16 Acquisition Status    When controlling image acquisition with a software trigger you can use the acquisition staus feature  to detemine when the camera is ready to be triggered for an image acquisition  Using this feature   you can avoid triggering the camera at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed with the current  camera settings     Not
221. riod and 1  resend is needed  The 1 resend needed is taken from the resends available via the  bandwidth reserve  The other 4 resends available via the bandwidth reserve are not needed   so they are added to the accumulator pool  Note that with the current settings  the  accumulator pool can only hold a maximum of 15 resends  So the pool is now 15     Frame Max Jitter  read only     If the Bandwidth Reserve Accumulation parameter is set to a high value  the camera can  experience a large burst of data resends during transmission of a frame  This burst of resends will  delay the start of transmission of the next acquired frame  The Frame Max Jitter parameter  indicates the maximum time in ticks  one tick   8 ns  that the next frame transmission could be  delayed due to a burst of resends     Device Max Throughput  read only     Indicates the maximum amount of data  in bytes per second  that the camera could generate given  its current settings and an ideal world  This parameter gives no regard to whether the GigE network  has the capacity to carry all of the data and does not consider any bandwidth required for resends   In essence  this parameter indicates the maximum amount of data the camera could generate with  no network restrictions     If the Acquisition Frame Rate abs parameter has been used to set the camera   s frame rate  the  camera will use this frame rate setting to calculate the device max throughput  If software or  hardware triggering is being used to control 
222. rmula when the averaging feature is used  see Section 11 9 on page 173     104    Basler pilot    Image Acquisition Control    Example    Assume that you are using a piA640 210gm camera set for an exposure time of 2000 us and for  600 x 400 resolution  Also assume that you have checked the value of the Device Current  Throughput parameter  the Payload Size parameters and found them to be 110000000 and 240000  respectively  and the averaging feature is not used     Formula 1     1    Max F Ep een ee erate eee  aE Amero Cano 8 761s  eOOT 17 Lie    Max Frames s   248 4 frames s    Formula 2     1    Max Pramesis    S00 is 4 4609 is    Max Frames s   488 5 frames s    Formula 3     110000000  240000    Max Frames s   458 3 frames s    Max Frames s      Formula one returns the lowest value  So in this case  the limiting factor is the sensor readout time  and the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate would be 248 4 frames per second     Basler pilot 105    Image Acquisition Control    106 Basler pilot    9 Pixel Data Formats    Pixel Data Formats    By selecting a pixel data format  you determine the format  layout  of the image data transmitted by  the camera  This section provides detailed information about the available pixel data formats     9 1    Setting the Pixel Data Format    The setting for the camera   s Pixel Format parameter determines the format of the pixel data that will  be output from the camera  The available pixel formats depend on the camera model and whether 
223. rom a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your  PC  you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser included in the  pylon API  Once the chunk parser has been used  you can retrieve the CRC information  Note that  the CRC information provided by the chunk parser is not the CRC checksum itself  Rather it is a  true false result  When the image and appended chunks pass through the parser  the parser  calculates a CRC checksum based on the received image and chunk information  It then compares  the calculated CRC checksum with the CRC checksum contained in the CRC checksum chunk  If  the two match  the result will indicate that the image data is OK  If the two do not match  the result  will indicate that the image is corrupted     You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application  software by using the pylon API  You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data  The  following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode  enable the time stamp  chunk  run the parser  and retrieve the frame counter chunk data           Make chunk mode active and enable CRC chunk  Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue  true     Camera ChunkSelector SetValue  ChunkSelector_PayloadCRC1l6             Basler pilot 211    Features          Camera ChunkEnable SetValue  true          Check the CRC checksum of an grabbed image   IChunkParser  amp ChunkParser     Camera CreateChunkParser       Gr
224. rom the camera will automatically be set  to 1  Therefore  you should only use the shift by 2  setting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are  all less than 64     Shifted Twice    wnr    Shift by 3    When the camera is set to shift by 3  the output from  the camera will include bit 8 through bit 1 from each    AD  ADC  7    fo    f bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit  The result of shifting three times is that the output of n i0 987 6 5432 1 0  the camera is effectively multiplied by 8        If the pixel values being output by the camera   s sensor  are high enough to set bit 9  bit 10  or bit 11 to 1  we  recommend not using shift by 3  If you do nonetheless   all bits output from the camera will automatically be set  to 1  Therefore  you should only use the shift by 3  setting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are  all less than 32     Shifted Three Times    A ane    L       B   gt         Shift by 4    When the camera is set to shift by 4  the output from  the camera will include bit 7 through bit 0 from each    ADC  ADE    tees F   bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit  The result of shifting four times is that the output of n 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  the camera is effectively multiplied by 16        If the pixel values being output by the camera   s  sensor are high enough to set bit 8  bit 9  bit 10  or bit  11 to 1  we recommend n
225. rval defined by the Packet Timeout parameter     36 Basler pilot    Basler Network Drivers and Parameters    Maximum Number Resend Requests   The Maximum Number Resend Requests parameter sets  the maximum number of resend requests the performance driver will send to the camera for each  missing packet     Resend Timeout   The Resend Timeout parameter defines how long  in milliseconds  the  performance driver will wait after detecting that a packet is missing before sending a resend request  to the camera  The parameter applies only once to each missing packet after the packet was  detected as missing     Resend Request Response Timeout   The Resend Request Response Timeout parameter  defines how long  in milliseconds  the performance driver will wait after sending a resend request  to the camera before considering the resend request as lost     If a resend request for a missing packet is considered lost and if the maximum number of resend  requests as set by the Maximum Number Resend Requests parameter has not yet been reached   another resend request will be sent  In this case  the parameter defines the time separation  between consecutive resend requests for a missing packet     Packet Timeout   The Packet Timeout parameter defines how long  in milliseconds  the  performance driver will wait for the next expected packet before it sends a resend request to the  camera  This parameter ensures that resend requests are sent for missing packets near to the end  of a frame  In th
226. rve  and results in a lower gray value for a given  amount of sensor output     Increasing the gain is useful when at your   brightest exposure  a gray value lower than   255  in modes that output 8 bits per pixel  or 0  4095  in modes that output 12 bits per pixels  0 25 50 100  is reached  For example  if you found that at  your brightest exposure the gray values  output by the camera were no higher than  127  in an 8 bit mode   you could increase the  gain to 6 dB  an amplification factor of 2  and  thus reach gray values of 254     Sensor Output Signal        Fig  43  Gain in dB    As mentioned in the  Functional Description  section of this manual  for readout purposes  the  sensor used in the camera is divided into two halves  As a result of this design  there are three gain  adjustments available  Gain Raw All  Gain Raw Tap 1  and Gain Raw Tap 2     Gain Raw All is a global adjustment  i e   its setting affects both halves of the sensor     Gain Raw Tap 1 sets an additional amount of gain for the right half of the sensor  The total gain for  the right half of the sensor will be the sum of the Gain Raw All value plus the Gain Raw Tap 1 value     Gain Raw Tap 2 sets an additional amount of gain for the left half of the sensor  The total gain for  the left half of the sensor will be the sum of the Gain Raw All value plus the Gain Raw Tap 2 value     For each camera model  the minimum and maximum allowed Gain Raw and Gain Total settings are  shown in the tables below     B
227. s       Specification    piA640 210gm gc       piA1000 48gm gc       piA1600 35gm gc       Size  L x W x H    standard housing      90   head housing     86 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm  without lens adapter or connectors     98 5 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm  with lens adapter and connectors        104 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm  without front module or connectors     110 mm x 44 mm x 41 8 mm  with front module and connectors        Weight   standard housing      90   head housing       220 g  typical          240 g  typical        Conformity          CE  FCC  GenICam  GigE Vision  IP30       Table 1  General Specifications    Basler pilot       Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions       Specification    piA1900 32gm gc                      Sensor Size gm  1928 x 1084    H x V pixels  gc  1926 x 1082   Sensor Type Kodak KAI 2093M CM  Progressive scan CCD   Optical Size 1    Pixel Size 7 4 um x 7 4 um   Max  Frame Rate 32 fps     at full resolution        Mono Color    All models available in mono or color       Data Output Type    Fast Ethernet  100 Mbit s  or Gigabit Ethernet  1000 Mbit s        Pixel Data Formats    Mono Models  Mono 8  equivalent to DCAM Mono 8    Mono 16  equivalent to DCAM Mono 16    Mono 12 Packed   YUV 4 2 2 Packed  equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2   YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  Packed   Mono 8  equivalent to DCAM Mono 8    Bayer GB 8  equivalent to DCAM Raw 8    Bayer GB 16  equivalent to DCAM Raw 16    Bayer GB 12 Packed   YUV 4 2 2 Packed  equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2   YUV 4 2 
228. s non volatile memory into the camera   s active set  When you do this  the  loaded set overwrites the parameters in the active set  Since the settings in the active set control  the current operation of the camera  the settings from the loaded set will now be controlling the  camera     You can also load the default set into the camera   s active set     To load a saved configuration set or the default set from the camera   s non volatile memory into the  active set    Set the User Set Selector to User Set 1  User Set 2  User Set 3 or Default    Execute a User Set Load command to load the selected set into the active set     You can set the User Set Selector and execute the User Set Load command from within your  application software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to  set the selector and execute the command        Camera UserSetSelector SetValue  UserSetSelector_UserSet2          Camera UserSetLoad Execute        Note   Loading a user set or the default set into the active set is only allowed when  the camera is idle  i e  when it is not acquiring images continuously or does not  have a single image acquisition pending    Loading the Default Set with the Standard Factory Setup selected into the  active set is a good course of action if you have grossly misadjusted the  settings in the camera and you are not sure how to recover  The standard  factory setup is optimized for use in typical situations and will provide good  camera p
229. s the Black Level Raw Tap 1  setting must be less than or equal to 1023     The sum of the Black Level Raw All setting plus the Black Level Raw Tap 2  setting must also be less than or equal to 1023     Basler pilot 153    Features    Setting the Black Level    To set the Black Level Raw All value    Set the Black Level Selector to All    Set the Black Level Raw parameter to your desired value   To set the Black Level Raw Tap 1 value    Set the Black Level Selector to Tap 1    Set the Black Level Raw parameter to your desired value   To set the Black Level Raw Tap 2 value     Set the Black Level Selector to Tap 2   Set the Black Level Raw parameter to your desired value     You can set the Black Level Selector and the Black Level Raw parameter values from within your  application software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to  set the selector and the parameter value        Set Black Level Raw All  Camera BlackLevelSelector SetValu   BlackLevelSelector_All          Camera BlackLevelRaw SetValue  64            Set Black Level Raw Tap 1  Camera BlackLevelSelector SetValu   BlackLevelSelector_Tapl          Camera BlackLevelRaw SetValue  0         Set Black Level Raw Tap 2       Camera BlackLevelSelector SetValu   BlackLevelSelector_Tap2             Camera BlackLevelRaw SetValue  0          For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler 
230. s uncorrected and corrected pixel brightnesses that are normalized by the  maximum pixel brightness  The maximum pixel brightness equals 255 for 8 bit output and 4095 for  12 bit output     When the gamma correction factor is set to 1  the output pixel brightness will not be corrected     A gamma correction factor between 0 and 1 will result in increased overall brightness  and a gamma  correction factor greater than 1 will result in decreased overall brightness     In all cases  black  output pixel brightness equals 0  and white  output pixel brightness equals 255  at 8 bit output and 4095 at 12 bit output  will not be corrected     Enabling Gamma Correction and Setting the Gamma    You can enable or disable the gamma correction feature by setting the value of the Gamma Enable  parameter     When gamma correction is enabled  the correction factor is determined by the value of the Gamma  parameter  The Gamma parameter can be set in a range from 0 to 3 99902  So if the Gamma  parameter is set to 1 2  for example  the gamma correction factor will be 1 2     You can set the Gamma Enable and Gamma parameter values from within your application  software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the  parameter values           Enable the Gamma feature       Camera GammaEnable SetValue  true             Set the Gamma value to 1 2    Camera Gamma SetValue  1 2       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon
231. sable inversion     You can set the Line Selector and the Line Inverter parameter value from within your application  software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the  selector and the parameter value           Enable the inverter on output line 1       Camera LineSelector SetValue  LineSelector_Outl             Camera LineInverter SetValue  true       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference   You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     Basler pilot 144     O Control    10 2 4 Working with Timers    The camera has four timer output signals available  Timer 1  Timer 2  Timer 3  and Timer 4  As  shown in Figure 41  each timer works as follows     A trigger source event occurs that starts the timer    A delay period begins to expire    When the delay expires  the timer signal goes high and a duration period begins to expire   When the duration period expires  the timer signal goes low     Duration    e     Delay       lt    ______ gt     Trigger source event occurs    Fig  41  Timer Signal    Currently  the only trigger source event available to start the timer is  exposure active     In other  words  you can use exposure start to trigger the start of a timer     Timer 1 can only be assigned to output line 1  Timer 2 can only be assigned t
232. see Figure 36   The camera calculates the rise of the trigger ready  signal based on the current exposure time parameter setting  the current size of the area of interest   and the time it will take to readout the captured pixel values from the sensor     The trigger ready signal is especially useful if you want to run the camera at the maximum  acquisition frame capture rate for the current conditions  If you monitor the trigger ready signal and  you trigger acquisition of each new image immediately after the signal goes high  you will be sure  that the camera is operating at the maximum acquisition frame rate for the current conditions     Signal goes high Signal goes low Signal goes high Signal goes low  at earliest safe when exposure at earliest safe when exposure   moment to trigger for acquisition moment to trigger for acquisition  acquisition N 1 N 1 begins acquisition N 2 N 2 begins          TrigRdy  Signal  Image Acquisition N  Exposure   Readout             Image Acquisition N 1  Exposure Readout                   Image Acquisition N 2  Exposure Readout                Time    Fig  36  Trigger Ready Signal    96 Basler pilot    Image Acquisition Control    You should be aware that if the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter is enabled  the operation of  the trigger ready signal will be influenced by the value of the parameter     If the value of the parameter is greater than zero but less than the maximum allowed  the  trigger ready will go high at the rate specified
233. signal is assigned to Output Line 1 and the  Trigger Ready Signal is assigned to Output Line 2     You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application  software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the  selector and the parameter value           Camera LineSelector SetValue  LineSelector_Out1       Camera LineSource SetValue  LineSource_ExposureActive                      Camera LineSelector SetValue  LineSelector_Out2             Camera  LineSource SetValue  LineSource_TriggerReady  j        For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters   For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     For more information about setting the state of user settable output signals  see Section 10 2 2 on  page 140     For more information about working with the timer output signals  see Section 10 2 4 on page 142    Basler pilot 139     O Control    For more information about the exposure active signal  see Section 8 7 on page 98     For more information about the trigger ready signal  see Section 8 6 on page 96     10 2 2 Setting the State of User Settable Output Lines    As mentioned in the previous section  you can designate one or more of the user output lines as   user settable   Once you have designated an output line 
234. sing packets are detected here      2  Stream of packets  Gray indicates that the status was checked as the packet entered the  receive window  White indicates that the status has not yet been checked      3  Receive window of the performance driver     4  Threshold for sending resend requests  resend request threshold      5  A separate resend request is sent for each packets 997  998  and 999     6  Threshold for batching resend requests for consecutive missing packets  resend request    batching threshold   Only one resend request will be sent for the consecutive missing  packets     34 Basler pilot    Basler Network Drivers and Parameters    Resend Request Threshold   This parameter determines the location of the resend request  threshold within the receive window as shown in Figure 16  The parameter value is in per cent of  the width of the receive window  In Figure 16 the resend request threshold is set at 33 33  of the  width of the receive window     A stream of packets advances packet by packet beyond the resend request threshold  i e  to the  left of the resend request threshold in Figure 16   As soon as the position where a packet is missing  advances beyond the resend request threshold  a resend request is sent for the missing packet     In the example shown in Figure 16  packets 987 to 1005 are within the receive window and packets  997 to 999 and 1002 were detected as missing  In the situation shown  a resend request is sent to  the camera for each of the missin
235. so illustrates how the debouncer delays a  valid signal     Unfiltered arriving signals    Debouncer          T T   lt     __ gt     I   l     1    debouncer  value l  l       Transferred valid signal      gt        delay    TIMING CHARTS ARE NOT DRAWN TO SCALE  Fig  53  Filtering of Input Signals by the Debouncer    The debouncer value is determined by the value of the Line Debouncer Time Abs parameter value   The parameter is set in microseconds and can be set in a range from 0 to approximately 1 s     Basler pilot 195    Features    To set a debouncer     Use the Line Selector to select the camera input line for which you want to set the debouncer    input line1 or 2     Set the value of the Line Debouncer Time Abs parameter   You can set the Line Selector and the value of the Line Debouncer Abs parameter from within your  application software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to  set the selector and the parameter value       Select the input line   Camera LineSelector SetValue  LineSelector_Linel                Set the parameter value to 100 microseconds    Camera  LineDebouncerTimeAbs SetValue  100             For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     196 Basler pilot    Features    11 15 T
236. some auto functions  the target value is fixed  For other auto functions  the target value can be  set  as can the limits between which the related parameter value will be automatically adjusted  For  example  the gain auto function lets you set an average gray value for the image as a target value  and also set a lower and an upper limit for the gain parameter value     Generally  the different auto functions can operate at the same time  For more information  see the  following sections describing the individual auto functions        pertinent camera settings and with the general circumstances used for capturing  images  Otherwise  the target value will only be approached     For example  with a short exposure time  insufficient illumination  and a low setting  for the upper limit of the gain parameter value  the Gain Auto function may not be  able to achieve the current target average gray value setting for the image        A target value for an image property can only be reached if it is in accord with all                   only   An auto function uses the binned pixel data and controls the image property       You can use an auto function when binning is enabled  monochrome cameras  of the binned image                 For more information about binning  see Section 11 7 on page 166     180 Basler pilot    Features    11 12 1 1 Modes of Operation    The following auto function modes of operation are available     All auto functions provide the  once  mode of operation  Wh
237. st few images may not be affected  by the auto function        After you have set an auto function to  once  or  continuous  operation mode           allow reaching a target value for an image property  the auto function will try to       If an auto function is set to  once  operation mode and if the circumstances will not  reach the target value for a maximum of 30 images and will then be set to  off                  Basler pilot 181    Features    11 12 1 2 Auto Function AOI    An Auto Function AOI must be set separately from the AOI used to define the size of captured  images  Image AOI   You can specify a portion of the sensor array and only the pixel data from the  specified portion will be used for auto function control     An Auto Function AOI is referenced to the top left corner of the sensor array  The top left corner is  designated as column 0 and row 0 as shown in Figure 44     The location and size of an Auto Function AOI is defined by declaring an X offset  coordinate   a  width  a Y offset  coordinate   and a height  For example  suppose that you specify the X offset as  14  the width as 5  the Y offset as 7  and the height as 6  The area of the array that is bounded by  these settings is shown in Figure 44     Only the pixel data from within the area defined by your settings will be used by the related auto  function     Column  012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30       Row 0                                      Offs
238. sted within set limits  until a  target average gray value for the pixel data from Auto Function AOI1 is reached  Automatic  adjustments for Gain Raw Tap 1 and Gain Raw Tap 2 are not available     The gain auto function uses Auto Function AOI1 and can be operated in the  once  and continuous   modes of operation     If Auto Function AOI does not overlap the Image AOI  see the  Auto Function AOI  section  the  pixel data from Auto Function AOI will not be used to control the image brightness  Instead  the  current manual setting of the Gain Raw parameter value will control the image brightness     When the gain auto function is used  the exposure auto function can be used at the same time  In  this case  however  you must also set the auto function profile feature     For more information about gain  see Section 11 1 on page 149   For more information about the auto function profile feature  see Section 11 12 4 on page 191     To use the gain auto function  perform the following steps     Select Auto Function AOI1    Set the postion and size of Auto Function AOI1    Set the lower and upper limits for the Gain Raw  All  parameter value   Set the target average gray value    If necessary  set the auto function profile     OF Or GB Ga NO       Enable the gain auto function by setting it to  once  or  continuous   You must choose the   continuous  setting when using the auto function profile     The currently settable limits for the Auto Gain Raw parameter value depend on the curr
239. sting of one packet used to signal the end of the data block     The packet size parameter sets the size of the packets that the camera will use when it sends the  data payload via the selected stream channel  The value is in bytes  The value does not affect the  leader and trailer size and the last data packet may be a smaller size     Basler pilot 43    Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth    The packet size parameter should always be set to the maximum size that your network adapter  and network switches  if used  can handle     Inter packet Delay  read write     Sets the delay in ticks between the packets sent by the camera  Applies to the selected stream  channel  Increasing the inter packet delay will decrease the camera   s effective data transmission  rate and will thus decrease the network bandwidth used by the camera     In the current camera implementation  one tick   8 ns  To check the tick frequency  you can read  the Gev Timestamp Tick Frequency parameter value  This value indicates the number of clock ticks  per second     Frame Transmission Delay  read write     Sets a delay in ticks  one tick   8 ns  between when a camera would normally begin transmitting  an acquired frame and when it actually begins transmission  This parameter should be set to zero  in most normal situations     If you have many cameras in your network and you will be simultaneously triggering image  acquisition on all of them  you may find that your network switch or n
240. t     If the Acquisition Frame Rate abs parameter has been used to set the camera   s frame rate  the  Resulting Frame Rate parameter will show the Acquisition Frame Rate abs parameter setting  If  software or hardware triggering is being used to control the camera   s frame rate  the Resulting  Frame Rate parameter will indicate the maximum frame rate allowed given the current camera  settings     You can read or set the camera   s network related parameter values from within your application  software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the  selector and the parameter values        Payload Size  int64_t payloadSize   Camera PayloadSize GetValue          GevStreamChannelSelector       Camera GevStreamChannelSelector SetValu    GevStreamChannelSelector_StreamChannel0O          PacketSize  Camera GevSCPSPacketSize SetValue  1500             Inter packet Delay  Camera GevSCPD SetValue  1000          Frame transmission Delay    Camera GevSCFTD SetValue  1000          Bandwidth Reserve  Camera GevSCBWR SetValue  10       48 Basler pilot    Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth       Bandwidth Reserve Accumulation    Camera GevSCBWRA SetValue  10          Frame Jitter Max    int64_t jitterMax   Camera GevSCFJM GetValue           Device Max Throughput  int64_t maxThroughput   Camera GevSCDMT GetValue          Device Current Throughput  int64_t currentThroughput   Camera GevSCDCT GetValue          Resulting Framerate
241. t 171    Features    Setting Reverse X    You can enable or disable the reverse X feature by setting the ReverseX parameter value  You can  set the parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API  The following  code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value           Enable reverse X       Camera ReverseX SetValue  true      For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameter     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     172 Basler pilot    Features    11 9 Averaging    The avaraging feature lets you obtain an image that is the average of a set number of consecutively  acquired individual images  You can average up to 256 individual images     When averaging is active  the pixel values for each pixel will be summed and the total for each pixel  will be divided by the number of the individual images acquired  Decimals of the resulting average  pixel values will be truncated and the averaged pixel values will be transmitted as integers     You can use averaging for all modes of image acquisition  You can obtain averaged images when  the camera   s acquisition mode is set to single frame and to continuous and when the camera ac   quires images continuously  free run  or when triggers are used     Each individual image must be triggered separately  A
242. t Lines    7 7 2 1 Voltage Requirements    The following voltage requirements apply to the I O output VCC  pin 10 of the 12 pin receptacle         Voltage Significance        lt   3 3 VDC The I O output may operate erratically         3 3 to  24 VDC   Recommended operating voltage               30 0 VDC Absolute maximum  the camera may be damaged if the absolute maximum is exceeded           Table 9  Voltage Requirements for the I O Output VCC    7 7 2 2 Line Schematic    The camera is equipped with four physical output lines designated as Output Line 1  Output Line 2   Output Line 3  and Output Line 4  The output lines are accessed via the 12 pin receptacle on the  back of the camera     As shown in the I O schematic  each output line is opto isolated  See the previous section for the  recommended operating voltage  The absolute maximum voltage is  30 0 VDC  The maximum  current allowed through an output circuit is 100 mA     A conducting transistor means a logical one and a non conducting transistor means a logical zero     Figure 26 shows a typical circuit you can use to monitor an output line with a voltage signal  The  circuit in Figure 26 is monitoring output line 1             Your Gnd    Voltage  Output  Signal  to You     O_Out_1    ONOoRWND       O_Out_VCC     3 3 to  24  VDC    Camera          12 Pin Your Gnd  Receptacle    Fig  26  Typical Voltage Output Circuit    Basler pilot 73    Physical Interface    Figure 27 shows a typical circuit you can use to monitor an
243. t counter chunk     203  206  207   ES E ies eid indeed 208  trigger mode parameter                 77  80  87  trigger ready signal    96  trigger selector parameter              77  80  87  trigger software command                  81  82  trigger source paramete               005 80  87  trigger width exposure mode                 06 85  U  user configuration Set    221  user output selector seeen 140  user output value parameter    s e  140  V  ventilati  n iaminn aaa 24  vertical DINNING      se ssessseseeeereerrereeeeerne 166  E E E A EE 29  W  WENT iets feet aa e aeaaea 3 5 7  white balance   OXPlAINGO P 155   SOMING sieet iether teil ett  155    white balance auto  see balance white auto  write timeout parameter    41    Basler pilot    Index    Y   YUV 422  YUYV  packed pixel data format  sib ee libel A AAE EEA set odiatieantaeteiecere tee 114  YUV 422  YUYV  packed pixel format    132  YUV 422 data range ccce 131  YUV 422 packed pixel data format         114  YUV 422 packed pixel format                 129    239    Index    240 Basler pilot    
244. table     Test Image 5   Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient Feature Test  12 bit     The basic appearance of test image 5 is similar to test image 3  the 12 bit moving diagonal gray  gradient image   The difference between test image 5 and test image 3 is this  if a camera feature  that involves digital processing is enabled  test image 5 will show the effects of the feature while  test image 3 will not  This makes test image 5 useful for checking the effects of digital features such  as the luminance lookup table    Test Image 6   Moving Diagonal Color Gradient    The moving diagonal color gradient test image is available on color cameras only and is designed  for use when the camera is set for YUV output  As shown in Figure 57  test image six consists of   diagonal color gradients  The image moves by one pixel from right to left whenever you signal the  camera to capture a new image  To display this test pattern on a monitor  you must convert the YUV  output from the camera to 8 bit RGB        Fig  57  Test Image Six    Basler pilot 217    Features    11 20 Device Information Parameters    Each camera includes a set of  device information  parameters  These parameters provide some  basic information about the camera  The device information parameters include     Device Vendor Name  read only    contains the name of the camera   s vendor  This string will  always indicate Basler as the vendor     Device Model Name  read only    contains the model name of the camera  for example  
245. ter for your desired exposure time   Set the value of the camera   s Acquisition Mode parameter to Continuous    Execute an Acquisition Start command  This prepares the camera to react to software triggers   When you are ready to begin an image acquisition  execute a Trigger Software command     aor oN  gt     Image acquisition will start and exposure will continue for the length of time you specified in  step 1     6  At the end of the specified exposure time  readout and transmission of the acquired image will  take place     7  To acquire another image  go to step 4   8  Execute an Acquisition Stop command  The camera will no longer react to software triggers     If you are acquiring images using a series of software triggers  you must avoid acquiring images at  a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed with the current camera settings  You can use the  Acquisition Status feature to determine when the camera is ready to be triggered for the next image  acquisition     You should also be aware that if the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter is enabled  it will  influence the rate at which the Trigger Software command can be applied     If the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter is set to a value less than the maximum allowed   you can trigger acquisition at any rate up to the set value     If the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter is set to a value greater than the maximum  allowed  you can trigger acquisition at any rate up to the maximum allowed image acquisition  rate 
246. terial inside of the camera housing  If  operated with any foreign matter inside  the camera may fail or cause a fire    Avoid Electromagnetic fields   Do not operate the camera in the vicinity of strong electromagnetic fields  Avoid electrostatic  charging    Transport Properly    Transport the camera in its original packaging only  Do not discard the packaging     Clean Properly    Avoid cleaning the surface of the camera   s sensor if possible  If you must clean it  use a soft  lint  free cloth dampened with a small quantity of high quality window cleaner  Because electrostatic  discharge can damage the sensor  you must use a cloth that will not generate static during cleaning   cotton is a good choice      To clean the surface of the camera housing  use a soft  dry cloth  To remove severe stains  use a  soft cloth dampened with a small quantity of neutral detergent  then wipe dry     Do not use solvents or thinners to clean the housing  they can damage the surface finish     Read the manual    Read the manual carefully before using the camera     26 Basler pilot    Software and Hardware Installation    2 Software and Hardware  Installation    The information you will need to install and operate the camera is included in the Installation and  Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler   s pylon API  AW000611xx000      You can download the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler   s pylon API from  the Basler website  www baslerweb com indizes download_index
247. the brightest pixel is 100    lt   gt      If you changed the digital shift setting to shift by 1   the reading would increase to 200     When the camera is set to shift by 1  the least significant bit output from the camera for each pixel  value will be 0  This means that no odd gray values can be output and that the gray value scale will  only include values of 2  4  6  8  10  and so on  This absence of some gray values is commonly  referred to as  missing codes      If the pixel values being output by the camera   s sensor are high enough to set bit 11 to 1  we  recommend not using shift by 1  If you do nonetheless  all bits output from the camera will  automatically be set to 1  Therefore  you should only use the shift by 1 setting when your pixel  readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 2048     156 Basler pilot    Features    Shift by 2  When the camera is set to shift by 2  the output  from the camera will include bit 9 through bit 0 ADC    from each ADC along with 2 zeros as LSBs     bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit  The result of shifting twice is that the output of 1 0 9 e 7 6 5 t 3 2 1 0  the camera is effectively multiplied by 4        When the camera is set to shift by 2  the 2 least is S   significant bits output from the camera for each B Shifted Twice  pixel value will be 0  This means that the gray   value scale will only include every 4th gray   value  for example  4  8  16  20  and so on 
248. the camera   s frame rate  the maximum frame rate  allowed with the current camera settings will be used to calculate the device max throughput     Basler pilot 47    Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth    Device Current Throughput  read only     Indicates the actual bandwidth  in bytes per second  that the camera will use to transmit image data  and chunk data given the current area of interest settings  chunk feature settings  and the pixel  format setting     If the Acquisition Frame Rate abs parameter has been used to set the camera   s frame rate  the  camera will use this frame rate setting to calculate the device current throughput  If software or  hardware triggering is being used to control the camera   s frame rate  the maximum frame rate  allowed with the current camera settings will be used to calculate the device current throughput     Note that the Device Current Throughput parameter indicates the bandwidth needed to transmit the  actual image data and chunk data  The Bandwidth Assigned parameter  on the other hand   indicates the bandwidth needed to transmit image data and chunk data plus the bandwidth reserved  for retrys and the bandwidth needed for any overhead such as leaders and trailers     Resulting Frame Rate  read only     Indicates the maximum allowed frame acquisition rate  in frames per second  given the current  camera settings  The parameter takes the current area of interest  exposure time  and bandwidth  settings into accoun
249. the camera is set for rising edge triggering  the exposure time begins when  the ExTrig signal rises and continues until the ExTrig signal falls  If the camera is set for falling edge  triggering  the exposure time begins when the ExTrig signal falls and continues until the ExTrig  signal rises  Figure 32 illustrates trigger width exposure with the camera set for rising edge  triggering    Trigger width exposure is especially useful if you intend to vary the length of the exposure time for  each captured image     ExTrig Signal Period       m      Exposure  Ei  ExTrig Signal    Fig  32  Trigger Width Exposure with Rising Edge Triggering       When you operate the camera in trigger width exposure mode  you must use the camera   s  exposure setting to set an exposure time  The exposure time setting will be used by the camera to  operate the trigger ready signal     Basler pilot 85    Image Acquisition Control    You should adjust the exposure setting to represent the shortest exposure time you intend to use   For example  assume that you will be using trigger width exposure and that you intend to use the  ExTrig signal to vary the exposure time in a range from 3000 us to 5500 us  In this case you would  use the exposure setting to set the exposure time to 3000 us     If you are using the trigger width exposure mode and the camera is operating with overlapped  exposures  there is something you must keep in mind  If the action of the ExTrig signal would end  the current exposure 
250. the frame transmission time formula returns a value that is less than the  readout time  the approximate frame transmission time will be equal to the readout time     Due to the nature of the Ethernet network  the transmission start delay can vary from frame to   frame  The start delay  however  is of very low significance when compared to the transmission  time    For more information about the Payload Size and Device Current Throughput parameters  see  Section 5 1 on page 43     Basler pilot 101    Image Acquisition Control    8 9 Maximum Allowed Acquisition  Frame Rate    In general  the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate for your camera can be limited by three  factors     The amount of time it takes to read the data for an acquired image  known as a frame  from the  image sensor to the frame buffer  This time varies depending on the height of the frame   Shorter frames take less time to read out of the sensor  The frame height is determined by the  camera   s AOI settings     The exposure time for acquired frames  If you use very long exposure times  you can acquire  fewer frames per second     The amount of time that it takes to transmit an acquired frame from the camera to your host  PC  The amount of time needed to transmit a frame depends on the bandwidth assigned to the  camera     Note      When the averaging feature is used  an increased acquisition frame rate  can be achieved if the frame transmission is the most limiting factor  The  acquired images are not 
251. the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate  see  Section 8 9 on page 102     Note      The explanations in Section 8 2 2 and Section 8 2 3 are intended to give you  a basic idea of how the use of a software trigger works  For a more complete  description  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide and to the sample  programs included in the Basler pylon Software Development Kit  SDK      Basler pilot 83    Image Acquisition Control    8 3 Controlling Image Acquisition  with a Hardware Trigger    You can configure the camera so that an external hardware trigger  ExTrig  signal applied to one of  the input lines will control image acquisition  A rising edge or a falling edge of the ExTrig signal can  be used to trigger image acquisition     The ExTrig signal can be periodic or non periodic  When the camera is operating under control of  an ExTrig signal  the period of the ExTrig signal will determine the rate at which the camera is  acquiring images     1                Acquisition F Rat  ExTrig period in seconds Sena i    For example  if you are operating a camera with an ExTrig signal period of 20 ms  0 020 s      A  f  0 020     0 fps    So in this case  the acquisition frame rate is 50 fps     In order for the camera to detect a transition from low to high  the ExTrig signal must be held high  for at least 100 nanoseconds  In order for the camera to detect a transition from high to low  the  ExTrig signal must be held low for at least 100 nanoseconds     By default  inp
252. the parameter value        Camera TimerSelector SetValue  TimerSelector_Timerl          Camera TimerDelayAbs SetValue  100       When you use the Timer Delay Abs parameter to set the delay time  the camera accomplishes the  setting change by automatically changing the Timer Delay Raw parameter to achieve the value  specified by the Timer Delay Abs setting  This leads to a limitation that you must keep in mind if you  use Timer Delay Abs parameter to set the delay time  That is  you must set the Timer Delay Abs  parameter to a value that is equivalent to a setting you could achieve by using the Timer Delay Raw  and the current Timer Delay Base parameters  For example  if the time base was currently set to  50 us  you could use the Timer Delay Abs parameter to set the delay to 50 us  100 us  150 us  etc     Note that if you set the Timer Delay Abs parameter to a value that you could not achieve by using  the Timer Delay Raw and current Timer Delay Time Base parameters  the camera will automatically  change the setting for the Timer Delay Abs parameter to the nearest achieveable value     You should also be aware that if you change the delay time using the raw settings  the Timer Delay  Abs parameter will automatically be updated to reflect the new delay time     10 2 4 3 Setting a Timer Duration Time    There are two ways to set the duration time for a timer  by setting  raw  values or by setting an   absolute value   You can use whichever method you prefer to set the duration 
253. the parameters     For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29     Basler pilot    161    Features    11 5 Integrated IR Cut Filter  on Color Models     Color models of the camera that have a C mount lens adapter are equipped with an IR cut filter as  standard equipment  The filter is mounted inside of the lens adapter  Cameras without an IR cut  filter are available on request     Monochrome cameras do not include an IR cut filter in the lens adapter  Monochrome cameras with  a C mount lens adapter can be equipped with a filter on request     Lens Thread Length is Limited    The location of the IR cut filter limits the length of the threads on any lens you  use with the camera  If a lens with a very long thread length is used  the IR cut  CAUTION filter will be damaged or destroyed and the camera will no longer operate        162 Basler pilot    Features    11 6 Area of Interest  AOI     The area of interest  AOI  feature lets you specify a portion of the imaging sensor array and after  each image is acquired  only the pixel information from the specified portion of the array is  transmitted to the host PC     The area of interest is referenced to the top left corner of the array  The top left corner is designated  as column 0 and line 0 as shown in Figure 44     The location and size of the area of interest is defined by declaring an X offset  coordinate   a width   a Y offset  coordinate   and a height  For example  suppose that you specify the 
254. tial  design in process     7 1 General Description of the  Connections    The camera is interfaced to external circuity via connectors located on the back of the housing     An 8 pin  RJ 45 jack used to provide a 100 1000 Mbit s Ethernet connection to the camera   This jack includes a green LED and a yellow LED that indicate the state of the network  connection    A 12 pin receptacle used to provide access to the camera   s I O lines and to provide power to  the camera     The drawing below shows the location of the two connectors and the LEDs           12 pin  Receptacle                                                                               Green LED Yellow LED    Fig  22  Camera Connectors and LED    Basler pilot 61    Physical Interface    7 2    7 2 1    Connector Pin Assignments and  Numbering    12 pin Receptacle Pin Assignments    The 12 pin receptacle is used to access the two physical input lines and four physical output lines  on the camera  It is also used to supply power to the camera  The pin assignments for the  receptacle are shown in Table 5        Pin    Designation            Camera Power Gnd         Camera Power Gnd         I O Input 1       I O Input 2       I O Input Gnd       I O Output 1       1 O Output 2       Camera Power VCC          oO   INIO JAJA JOJN    Camera Power VCC               o    1 O Output VCC       11    I O Output 3       12          I O Output 4          Table 5  Pin Assignments for the 12 pin Receptacle    Note       Pins 1 
255. time     Setting the Duration with Raw Values    When the duration time for a timer is set using  raw  values  the duration time will be determined by  a combination of two elements  The first element is the value of the Timer Duration Raw parameter   and the second element is the Timer Duration Time Base  The duration time is the product of these  two elements     Duration Time    Timer Duration Raw Parameter Value  x  Timer Duration Time Base     By default  the Timer Duration Time Base is fixed at 1 us  Typically  the duration time is adjusted by  setting only the Timer Duration Raw parameter value     144 Basler pilot    I O Control    The Timer Duration Raw parameter value can range from 1 to 4095  So if the value is set to 100   for example  the timer duration will be 100 x 1 us or 100 us     To set the duration for a timer     Use the Timer Selector to select a timer   Set the value of the Timer Duration Raw parameter   You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Duration Raw parameter value from within your    application software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to  set the selector and the parameter value           Camera TimerSelector SetValue  TimerSelector_Timerl          Camera TimerDurationRaw SetValue  100       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters    
256. tion and with the requested files attached  Basler technical support contact information is   shown in the title section of this manual     226    The camera   s product ID        The camera   s serial number        Network adapter that you use       with the camera        Describe the problem in as much       detail as possible         If you need more space   use an extra sheet of paper         If known  what   s the cause       of the problem           When did the problem occur  7 After start        After a certain action  e g   a change of parameters         While running                 Basler pilot    Troubleshooting and Support    7 How often did does the problem rf Once  f Every time   occur   f Regularly when           Occasionally when                 8 How severe is the problem  f Camera can still be used       Camera can be used after   take this action           J7 Camera can no longer be used     9 Did your application ever run r Yes rt No  without problems     10 Parameter set    It is very important for Basler technical Support to get a copy of the exact camera parameters that  you were using when the problem occurred     To make note of the parameters  use Basler   s pylon Viewer tool   If you cannot access the camera  please try to state the following parameter settings       Image Size  AOI         Pixel Format        Packet Size        Exposure Time        z  a  E  a    Frame Rate        11 Live image test image    If you are having an image problem  try 
257. to Function AOI1    Set the postion and size of Auto Function AOI1    Set the lower and upper limits for the Exposure Time Abs parameter value   Set the target average gray value    If necessary  set the auto function profile     Enable the exposure auto function by setting it to  once  or  continuous   You must choose the   continuous  setting when using the auto function profile     NO a fF WN  gt     The settable limits for the Exposure Time Abs parameter value are limited by the minimum allowed  and maximum possible exposure time of the camera model     Basler pilot 189    Features    The target average gray value may range from 0  black  to 255  white   Note that this range of  numbers applies to 8 bit and to 16 bit  12 bit effective  output modes  Accordingly  also for 16 bit  output modes  black is represented by 0 and white by 255     You can carry out steps 1 to 7 from within your application software by using the pylon API  The  following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the parameter values     Selecting and setting Auto Function AOI1  See the  Auto Function AOI  section above     Setting the limits for the Exposure Time Abs parameter value  the set parameter values serve  as examples      Setting the target average gray value  A medium gray value is selected as an example     Enabling the exposure auto function and selecting  for example  the  continuous  mode of  operation        Select the appropriate auto function AOI for luminance statistics      
258. to Off   Execute the command if using software as the counter reset source     You can set the frame counter reset parameter values from within your application software by using  the pylon API  The following code snippets illustrate using the API to configure and set the frame  counter reset and to execute a reset via software        configure reset of frame counter    Camera CounterSelector SetValue  CounterSelector_Counter2             Camera CounterEventSource SetValue  CounterEventSource_FrameStart             select reset by signal on input line 1          Camera CounterResetSource SetValue  CounterResetSource_Linel          select reset by signal on input line 2    Basler pilot 203    Features          Camera CounterResetSource SetValue  CounterResetSource_Line2          select reset by software    Camera CounterResetSource SetValue  CounterResetSource_Software             execute reset by software          Camera CounterReset  Execute             disable reset       Camera CounterResetSource SetValue  CounterResetSource_Off     For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide    and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters     204 Basler pilot    Features    11 17 4Time Stamp    The Time Stamp feature adds a chunk to each acquired image containing a time stamp that was  generated when image acquisition was triggered     The time stamp is a 64 bit value  The tim
259. to generate and save live images that show the problem   Also generate and save test images  Please save the images in BMP format  zip them  and send  them to Basler technical support     Basler pilot 227    Troubleshooting and Support    228 Basler pilot    Revision History    Revision History                                  Doc  ID Number   Date Changes  AW00015101000   9 Feb 2007 Preliminary version of the document   AW00015102000   22 Feb 2007   Updated the camera weight and operating temperatur range  This is still a  preliminary version   AW00015103000   24 May 2007   First release covering production cameras   AW00015104000   8 June 2007   Modified Section 2 for the installation of the Basler pylon software  version  1 0   AW00015105000   19 July 2007   Integrated the Kodak KAI 2093 sensor   Minor corrections throughout the manual   Added information on IP30 in Section 1 2   Added warning not to remove the serial number in Section 1 9   Updated times in Section 7 7 3   Removed note on scA750 60 output in Sections 9 2 4  9 2 5  9 3 8  9 3 9   and 9 3 10   Modified the Max Gain Raw Tap 1 and Max Gain Raw Tap 2 settings for the  piA640 210 and the piA1000 48 in Section 11 1   Added binning information for the piA1600 35gm in Section 11 7   AW00015106000   20 Sept 2007   Integrated the Sony ICX625 sensor   Minor modifications and corrections throughout the manual   AW00015107000   17 Oct 2007   Corrected the Bayer filter alignment for the piA2400 12  in Sections 1 2   9 2
260. transmitted individually but will be used for  creating an averaged image  The averaged image will be transmitted at an  output frame rate which will be subject to the frame transmission time and  will be lower than the acquisition frame rate     To determine the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate with your current camera settings  you  can read the value of the camera   s Resulting Frame Rate parameter  This parameter indicates the  camera   s current maximum allowed frame rate taking into account the AOI  exposure time   bandwidth settings  and whether the averaging feature is enabled      For more information about AOI settings  see Section 11 6 on page 163   For more information about the Resulting Frame Rate parameter  see Section 5 1 on page 43     For more information about the averaging feature  see Section 11 9 on page 173     Increasing the Maximum Allowed Frame Rate    You may find that you would like to acquire frames at a rate higher than the maximum allowed with  the camera   s current settings  In this case  you must first use the three formulas described below  to determine what factor is restricting the maximum frame rate the most  Next  you must try to make  that factor less restrictive     You will often find that the sensor readout time is most restrictive factor  Decreasing the AOI  height for the acquired frames will decrease the sensor readout time and will make this factor  less restrictive     If you are using normal exposure times and you are usi
261. twork switch you are using     Unless you have already set the packet size for your network adapter during the installation of the  Basler pylon software  check the documentation for your adapter to determine the maximum packet  size  sometimes called    frame    size  that the adapter can handle  Many adapters can handle what  is known as    jumbo packets    or  jumbo frames   These are packets with a maximum size of 16 kB   Once you have determined the maximum size packets the adapter can handle  make sure that the  adapter is set to use the maximum packet size     Next  check the documentation for your network switch and determine the maximum packet size  that it can handle  If there are any settings available for the switch  make sure that the switch is set  for the largest packet size possible     Now that you have set the adapter and switch  you can determine the largest packet size the  network can handle  The device with the smallest maximum packet size determines the maximum  allowed packet size for the network  For example  if the adapter can handle 8 kB packets and the  switch can handle 6 kB packets  then the maximum for the network is 6 kB packets     Once you have determined the maximum packet size for your network  set the value of the Packet  Size parameter on each camera to this value     Tip   The manufacturer   s documentation sometimes makes it difficult to determine  the maximum packet size for a device  especially network switches  There is  a  quick and
262. ure    event reporting is enabled  an  end of exposure    event will be reported for  each image in the sequence of individual images  No  end of exposure    event will be reported spe   cifically for the averaged image     When achunk feature is enabled  the data chunk from the last image in the sequence of individual  images will be taken for the averaged image     Output Frame Rate  When averaging is used  the images will be transmitted at an output frame rate which will be lower    than the acquisition frame rate  As the number of averaged individual images increases  the output  frame rate will decrease     The output frame rate is described by the following formula     Acquisition Frame Rate  F R    CUIDU PEAME PAIE Number of Averaged Images    Example    Assume the acquisition frame rate is 248 4 frames per second and 3 images are averaged  then  the output frame rate will be 82 2 frames per second     Note that averaging will allow an increased acquisition frame rate compared to not using averaging   if the frame transmission is the most restricting factor  When averaging is used  Formula 3 in the   Maximum Allowed Acquisition Frame Rate  section is replaced by the following formula     Max  Frames s   Device Current Throughput Parameter Value x Number of Averaged Images  Payload Size Parameter    174 Basler pilot    Features    Setting Averaging    You can enable averaging by setting the AveragingNumberOfFrames parameter  Setting the pa   rameter   s value to e g  3 
263. us tests are performed on the camera and three factory  optimized setups are determined  The three factory optimized setups are     The Standard Factory Setup   is optimized for average conditions and will provide good  camera performance in many common applications  In the standard factory setup  the gain is  set to a low value  and all auto functions are set to off     The High Gain Factory Setup   is similar to the standard factory setup  but the gain is set to    6 GB     The Auto Functions Factory Setup   is similar to the standard factory setup  but the Gain Auto  and the Exposure Auto auto functions are both enabled and are set to the continuous mode of  operation  During automatic parameter adjustment  gain will be kept to a minimum     The factory setups are saved in permanent files in the camera   s non volatile memory  They are not  lost when the camera is reset or switched off and they cannot be changed     You can select one of the three factory setups to be the camera   s  default configuration set    Instructions for selecting which factory setup will be used as the default set appear below  Note that  your selection of which factory setup will serve as the default set will not be lost when the camera  is reset or switched off     The default configuration set can be loaded into the active set  The default configuration set can  also be selected as the camera   s startup set  Instructions for loading the default set into the active  set and for selecting the st
264. ut filter   however  they can be equipped with an internal filter on request     20 Basler pilot    Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    1 5 4 Mechanical Stress Test Results    Pilot cameras were submitted to an independent mechanical testing laboratory and subjected to the  stress tests listed below  The mechanical stress tests were performed on selected camera models  with standard housing  After mechanical testing  the cameras exhibited no detectable physical  damage and produced normal images during standard operational testing        Test    Standard    Conditions       Vibration   sinusoidal  each axis     DIN EN 60068 2 6    10 58 Hz   1 5 mm_58 500 Hz   20 g_1 Octave Minute  10 repetitions       Shock  each axis     DIN EN 60068 2 27    20 g  11 ms  10 shocks positive  20 g  11 ms  10 shocks negative       Bump  each axis     DIN EN 60068 2 29    20 g  11 ms  100 shocks positive  20 g  11 ms  100 shocks negative       Vibration   broad band random   digital control  each axis           DIN EN 60068 2 64       15 500 Hz   0 05 PSD  ESS standard profile    00 30 h       Table 4  Mechanical Stress Tests    The mechanical stress tests were performed with a dummy lens connected to a C mount  The  dummy lens was 35 mm long and had a mass of 66 g  Using a heavier or longer lens requires an  additional support for the lens     Basler pilot    21       Specifications  Requirements  and Precautions    1 6 Software Licensing Information    The software in the camera 
265. ut line 1 is assigned to receive an ExTrig signal     When you are triggering image acquisition with an ExTrig signal  you must not acquire images at a  rate that exceeds the maximum allowed for the current camera settings     For more information about setting the camera for hardware triggering and selecting the input line  to receive the ExTrig signal  see Section 8 3 2 on page 87     For more information about determining the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate  see  Section 8 9 on page 102     84 Basler pilot    Image Acquisition Control    8 3 1 Exposure Modes    If you are triggering exposure start with an ExTrig signal  two exposure modes are available   timed   and  trigger width      Timed Exposure Mode    When timed mode is selected  the exposure time for each image is determined by the value of the  camera   s exposure time parameter  If the camera is set for rising edge triggering  the exposure time  starts when the ExTrig signal rises  If the camera is set for falling edge triggering  the exposure time  starts when the ExTrig signal falls  Figure 31 illustrates timed exposure with the camera set for  rising edge triggering     ExTrig Signal Period          j    ExTrig Signal M       Exposure     duration determined by the  exposure time parameter     Fig  31  Timed Exposure with Rising Edge Triggering    Trigger Width Exposure Mode    When trigger width exposure mode is selected  the length of the exposure will be directly controlled  by the ExTrig signal  If 
266. ware by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to  set the selector and the parameter value     Camera TimerSelector SetValue  TimerSelector_Timerl                Camera TimerDurationAbs SetValue  100       Basler pilot 145     O Control    When you use the Timer Duration Abs parameter to set the duration time  the camera accomplishes  the setting change by automatically changing the Timer Duration Raw parameter to achieve the  value specified by the Timer Duration Abs setting  This leads to a limitation that you must keep in  mind if you use Timer Duration Abs parameter to set the duration time  That is  you must set the  Timer Duration Abs parameter to a value that is equivalent to a setting you could achieve by using  the Timer Duration Raw and the current Timer Duration Base parameters  For example  if the time  base was currently set to 50 us  you could use the Timer Duration Abs parameter to set the duration  to 50 us  100 us  150 us  etc     If you read the current value of the Timer Duration Abs parameter  the value will indicate the product  of the Timer Duration Raw parameter and the Timer Duration Time Base  In other words  the Timer  Duration Abs parameter will indicate the current duration time setting     You should also be aware that if you change the duration time using the raw settings  the Timer  Duration Abs parameter will automatically be updated to reflect the new duration time     146 Basler pilot    I O Control    10 3
267. while readout of the previously acquired image is still taking place  the camera  will automatically continue the exposure until readout of the previous image is complete  This  situation is illustrated Figure 31 for rising edge operation  On the first cycle of the ExTrig signal  shown in the figure  the signal rises and falls while readout is taking place  Normally you would  expect exposure to take place only when the ExTrig signal is high  But since the signal falls while  the previous frame is still reading out  the camera automatically extends exposure until the readout  is complete  On the second cycle of the ExTrig signal shown in the figure  the signal rises during  previous frame readout  but falls after the readout is complete  This is a normal situation and  exposure would be determined by the high time of the ExTrig signal as you would expect     TrigRdy  Signal  Exposure    ExTrig Signal O S eee  Frame N 1 Frame N  Frame Readout o  rmnm     rmen      Fig  33  Trigger Width Exposure Mode with Overlapped Exposure    You can set the exposure time parameter value and select an exposure mode from within your  application software by using the pylon API  The following code snippets illustrate using the API to  set the exposure time parameter and select the exposure mode           set for the timed exposure mode  set exposure time to 3000 us          Camera ExposureMode SetValu ExposureMode_Timed          Camera  ExposureTimeAbs SetValue  3000             set for the wi
268. will have  a defined 12 bit value associated with it   Locations 4089 through 4095 are not used   If the sensor  reports a value above 4088  the camera will not be able to perform an interpolation  In cases where  the sensor reports a value above 4088  the camera simply transmits the 12 bit value from location  4088 in the table     The advantage of the luminance lookup table feature is that it allows a user to customize the  response curve of the camera  The graphs below represent the contents of two typical lookup  tables  The first graph is for a lookup table where the values are arranged so that the output of the  camera increases linearly as the sensor output increases  The second graph is for a lookup table  where the values are arranged so that the camera output increases quickly as the sensor output  moves from 0 through 2048 and increases gradually as the sensor output moves from 2049 through  4096     176 Basler pilot    4095  3 3072  12 Bit  Camera  Output 2048  1024  0    0 1024 2048 3072 4095  12 Bit Sensor Reading    Fig  49  Lookup Table with Values Mapped in a Linear Fashion    4095    3072  12 Bit  Camera  Output 2048  1024  0    0 1024 2048 3072 4095  12 Bit Sensor Reading    Fig  50  Lookup Table with Values Mapped for Higher Camera Output at Low Sensor Readings    Basler pilot    Features    177    Features    Using the Luminance Lookup Table to Get 8 Bit Output    As mentioned above  when the camera is set for a pixel format where it outputs 12 effective 
269. with the current camera settings     You can set the exposure time and the Acquisition Mode parameter values from within your  application software by using the pylon API  You can also execute the Acquisition Start and Trigger  Software commands  The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the parameter  values and execute the commands        issuing software trigger commands          Camera ExposureTimeRaw SetValue  200     Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue  AcquisitionMode_Continuous  j        prepare for image acquisition here       Camera AcquisitionStart Execute      while     finished            Camera TriggerSoftware Execute         retrieve acquired image here       Camera AcquisitionStop Execute              how to set and test the Acquisition Frame Rate    82 Basler pilot    Image Acquisition Control    Camera AcquisitionFrameRateAbs SetValue  60 0             double resultingFrameRate   Camera ResultingFrameRateAbs GetValue              how to disable the FrameRateAbs parameter       Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue  false          For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer   s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters   For more information about the pylon Viewer  see Section 3 1 on page 29   For more information about the camera   s exposure time parameter  see Section 8 4 on page 91     For more information about determining 
270. x  A  acquisition frame rate  and AOISE natan eeri 102  and averaging ecese 102  174  maximum allowed                cceeeeeee 102  acquisition frame rate abs parameter  EEEN adie EEE a bed a Eea R EES 78  82  89  acquisition mode parameter  AATE 78  81  82  88  89  acquisition start command  EEE E 78  81  82  88  89  198  ACQUISITION Status    198  active configuration Set               c eeeee 220  alignment  color TING sacesccesecetcecsictees seaeeeesvancensl  116  AOI  see area of interest  N E E E TEE 30  area of interest  auto function AOI seeen 180  explained         eee eeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeeneeees 163  image AOL          ceessceeesseeeeeeseeeeeesees 182  SOMING kiaiii ess bake den 164  using with binning    168  auto FUNCTION        0 0 cceeeeteeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeees 180  mode of operation            eee 181  using with binning    180  auto function AOI  explain dinana 180  SINO ire a ie 185  auto function profile            cece eee 191  auto functions factory setup    s es 220  averaging  effect on acquisition frame rate         174  Oxplained nihin eri  173  Output frame rate eee eee 174  SOMING iri tether steisie eet 175  B  balance white auto           ee eeeeeeeeeee 192  bandwidth assigned parameter                  44  bandwidth reserve accumulation parameter  Bcd tare a ete Ra tee bce a a Ta 45  bandwidth reserve parametet               0  45  bandwidth  managing              eeeeeeeeeeeees 50  Bayer BG 12 packed pixel format            127    Basler pilot
271. x offset as 10  the  width as 16  the y offset as 6  and the height as 10  The area of the array that is bounded by these  settings is shown in Figure 44     The camera will only transfer pixel data from within the area defined by your settings  Information  from the pixels outside of the area of interest is discarded                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Column  012 3 4 5 67 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30  Line o  1 L  j a  Y 3  Offset    5 J  A 6  7 EEE  8 fc m  9 E w ON  Height     al el ele    11   i   L  12   5 U  13        4 m E The camera  will only  15 transmit the  16    pixel data  17   from this  18 1 area  19     r LaL L LI l     Li   Ney Offset    lt          Width    Fig  44  Area of Interest    One of the main advantages of the AOI feature is that decreasing the height of the AOI can increase  the camera   s maximum allowed acquisition frame rate     For more information about how changing the AOI height affects the maximum allowed frame rate   see Section 8 9 on page 102     Basler pilot 163    Features    Setting the AOI    By default  the AOI is set to use the full resolution of the camera   s sensor  You can ch
272. xel is an actual 8 bit brightness value similar to the pixel data  transmitted when a monochrome camera is set for Mono 8  The U and V values transmitted will  always be zero  With this format  a Y value is transmitted for each pixel  but the U and V values are  only transmitted for every second pixel     The order of the pixel data for a received frame in the image buffer in your PC is similar to the order  of YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  Packed output from a color camera     For more information about the YUV 4 2 2  YUYV  Packed format on color cameras  see  Section 9 3 9 on page 132     114 Basler pilot    Pixel Data Formats    9 3 Pixel Data Output Formats for  Color Cameras    9 3 1 The Bayer Color Filter    The sensor used in color models of the camera is equipped with an additive color separation filter  known as a Bayer filter  The pixel data output formats available on color cameras are related to the  Bayer pattern  so you need a basic knowledge of the Bayer filter to understand the pixel formats   With the Bayer filter  each individual pixel is covered by a micro lens that allows light of only one  color to strike the pixel  The pattern of the Bayer filter used on the camera is as shown in Figure 39   the alignment of the Bayer filter with repect to the sensor is shown as an example only  the figure  shows the  BG  filter alignment   As the figure illustrates  within each square of four pixels  one pixel  sees only red light  one sees only blue light  and two pixels see only g
273. y  setting only the Exposure Time Raw parameter     The Exposure Time Raw parameter value can range from 1 to 4095  So if the value is set to 100   for example  the exposure time will be 100 x 20 us or 2000 us     Settings for Obtaining the Maximum Possible Exposure Time    On all camera models  you can obtain the maximum possible exposure time  10000000 us  by  setting the Exposure Time Raw parameter value to 1 and the Exposure Time Base Abs parameter  value to 10000000 us     Changing the Exposure Time Base    By default  the Exposure Time Base is fixed at 20 us  and the exposure time is normally adjusted  by setting the value of the Exposure Time Raw parameter  However  if you require an exposure time  that is longer than what you can achieve by changing the value of the Exposure Time Raw  parameter alone  the Exposure Time Base Abs parameter can be used to change the exposure time  base     The Exposure Time Base Abs parameter value sets the exposure time base in us  The exposure  time base can be changed in 1 us increments and the default is 20 us     You can set the Exposure Time Raw and Exposure Time Base parameter values from within your  application software by using the pylon API  The following code snippet illustrates using the API to  set the parameter values           Camera ExposureMode SetValue  ExposureMode_Timed          Camera ExposureTimeRaw SetValue  100                Camera ExposureTimeBaseAbs SetValue  200       For detailed information about using the 
274. ylon   String_t vendorName   Camera DeviceVendorName GetValue           Read the Model Name parameter       Pylon   String_t modelName   Camera DeviceModelName GetValue             Read the Manufacturer Info parameter          Pylon   String_t manufacturerInfo   Camera DeviceManufacturerInfo GetValue          Read the Device Version parameter          Pylon  String_t deviceVersion   Camera DeviceVersion GetValue          Read the Firmware Version parameter       Pylon  String_t firmwareVersion   Camera DeviceFirmwareVersion GetValue        218 Basler pilot    Features          Read    the Device ID parameter       Pylon   String_t deviceID   Camera DeviceFirmwareVersion GetValue          Writ    and read the Device User ID       Camera DeviceUserID    custom name            Pylon  String_t deviceUserID   Camera DeviceUserID GetValue          Read  int64_t    the Sensor Width parameter    sensorWidth   Camera SensorWidth GetValue             Read  int  64_t       Read  int64_t    the Sensor Height parameter       sensorHeight   Camera SensorHeight GetValue       the Max Width parameter  maxWidth   Camera WidthMax GetValue             Read  int64_t    the Max Height parameter  maxHeight   Camera HeightMax GetValue       For detailed information about using the pylon API  refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide  and API Reference     You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily read the parameters and to read or  write the Device User ID     You can use th
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
BIOSTAT® B  電子化文書作成の手引き (改訂版)  Découvrez HappyMobile®  Hotpoint AQXGF 149 PM User's Manual    取扱説明書  Manual de usuario (v 1.0)  目 次  RTS DKP-8 User's Manual  Bridge - Came Più    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file